TB03300002E 1000321951 Catalog

1000443136-Catalog 1000443136-Catalog 1000443136-Catalog B4 unilog cesco-content

1000506622-Brochure 1000506622-Brochure 1000506622-Brochure B5 unilog cesco-content

1000264990-Catalog 1000264990-Catalog 1000264990-Catalog B1 unilog cesco-content

: Pdf 1000321951-Catalog 1000321951-Catalog B1 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 118 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

April 2016

Contents

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage 30.0-1

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

001

Motor Starters and

Contactors—Low Voltage

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Manual Motor Control

MS Starter with Hand/Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1

MS Manual Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2

Type B100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-3

XT Manual Motor Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-4

Lighting Contactors

Non-Combination Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1

Electrically Held Non-Combination—CN35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2

Mechanically Held Non-Combination—C30CNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5

Magnetically Latched—202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-9

Enclosed Combination Type—ECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-11

NEMA Motor Starters—Electromechanical

NEMA Motor Starters Freedom Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1

C440 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-11

C441 Motor Insight Motor Protection Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-13

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-15

XT IEC Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-20

EMS Electronic Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-34

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1

Autotransformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2

Part Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-3

Wye-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-4

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-6

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-10

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-18

DS6 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26

DS7 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-35

PSG Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-44

Enclosures

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1

Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-3

Group Control—Multi-Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1

Specifications:

See Eaton’s Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.

CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Sections 16481, Sections 26 29 13.11,

16484, 26 29 13.13,

16485, 26 29 13.15,

16902 26 29 05

Enclosed S801 Soft Start and Freedom NEMA

Starter with C440 Electronic Overload Relay

30.0-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

002

This page intentionally left blank.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.1-1

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type MS

003

MS Starters with Hand /Auto

Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts

Single-Phase

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed MS

Starter with Hand/Auto and Pilot Light

General Description

The enclosed manual motor starter

is a cost-effective solution offering

local and remote control capability,

overload protection, and running

light indication on small single-phase

motor applications for 10% less than

competitive devices.

Features

■Hand/Auto switch allows starter

control locally or from a remote

source such as a building

■Keyed heater packs ensure proper

positioning

■Ease of installation and wiring

■Trip-free handle can be locked in the

OFF position with optional handle

guard accessory (MSLG)

■Red RUN pilot light provides

indication status

Applications

■HVAC

■Commercial construction

■Exhaust fans

Standards and Certifications

■UL® 60967-4-1

Specifications

■1 hp at 120/240 V, single-phase

■0.40–16 FLA

■NEMA® Type 1 enclosure

Resources

■Catalog number: MST02RN1PH

■Volume 5, Tab 3.1—NEMA Manual

Starters

■www.eaton.mmshoa.com

Technical Data

Figure 30.1-1. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.1-2. Wiring Diagram

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

4.55

(115.6)

1.81

(46.0)

0.98

(24.9)

4.61 (117.1) 2.85 (72.4)

115–230 V

1 hp / 230 V

HAND–Toggle Closed

AUTO–Toggle Open

AUTO

HAND

Pilot Light

(If Used)

Motor

Thermostat

30.1-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type B100

004

MS Manual Starters

Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts

Single-Phase

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed

MS Starter

Application Description

MS manual single-phase starters are

designed to give positive, accurate,

trouble-free overload protection to

single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp.

Typical applications are fans, machine

tools, motors, HVAC, and so on.

Table 30.1-1. MS Ratings

Enclosures

■Type 1: General Purpose

■Type 1: Flush Mounted, General

Purpose

■Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight

■Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous

Locations

■Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G

Hazardous Locations

■Red pilot light available for NEMA® 1,

factory-installed or field-installed kit

Typical Specifications

Manual single-phase starters shall be

Eaton’s Type MS or approved equal for

motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They

shall be built and tested in accordance

with the applicable NEMA standards.

The starter shall have a “quick-make,

quick-break” toggle mechanism. The

overload shall have a field adjustment

allowing up to ±10% variance in ratings

of the nominal heater value.

Volts hp Po les

120/240 V, 277 Vac

120/240 Vdc

240 Vdc

32 Vdc

1

1

1/4

1/4

1 or 2

2

1

1 or 2

Figure 30.1-3. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)

Figure 30.1-4. Watertight (Cast Aluminum) Figure 30.1-5. Hazardous Location

(Cast Aluminum)

Figure 30.1-6. Flush Plates

13/64 Diameter

2 Mounting Holes

1/2 Diameter Conduit

3 Single Knockouts

1 in Each End & Back

As Shown

Indicating Light

(When Used)

KO

KO

KO

KO

1.56

(39.6)

0.88

(22.4)

0.55

(14.0)

4.16

(105.7)

3.06

(77.7)

2.38

(60.5)

2.11

(53.6)

2.55

(64.8)

1.19

(30.2)

0.73

(18.5)

1.97

(50.0)

Typical Front View

(Single Unit)

Typical Side View

3/4 Inch Pipe Top

5.81

(147.6)

2.91

(73.7)

5.13

(130.3)

0.75

(19.1) 3.63

(92.2)

3/4 Inch Pipe Top

19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole

0.81

(20.6) 0.42

(10.7)

5.88

(149.4)

6.72

(170.7)

3.94

(100.1) 3.50

(88.9)

2.63

(66.8) 0.44

(11.2)

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Mounting Purposes

(2) Holes

Indicating

Light

Handle

Guard

1 Unit

2.75

(69.9)

1.38

(35.1)

1.53

(38.9)

1.64

(41.7)

0.78

(19.8)

0.34

(8.6)

1.52

(38.6)

1.06

(26.9)

0.66

(16.8)

0.31

(7.9)

3.28

(83.3)

1.64

(41.7)

0.22

(5.6)

4.50

(114.3)

2.25

(57.2)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.1-3

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type B100

005

Type B100

Maximum 10 hp, 600 Volts

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed

B100 Starter

General Description

MS manual single-phase starters are

designed to give positive, accurate,

trouble-free overload protection to

single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp.

Typical applications are fans, machine

tools, motors, HVAC, and so on.

Table 30.1-2. MS Ratings

Enclosures

■Type 1: General Purpose

■Type 1: Flush Mounted, General

Purpose

■Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight

■Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous

Locations

■Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G

Hazardous Locations

■Red pilot light available for NEMA® 1,

factory-installed or field-installed kit

Typical Specifications

Manual single-phase starters shall be

Eaton’s Type MS or approved equal for

motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They

shall be built and tested in accordance

with the applicable NEMA standards.

The starter shall have a “quick-make,

quick-break” toggle mechanism. The

overload shall have a field adjustment

allowing up to ±10% variance in ratings

of the nominal heater value.

Volts hp Po les

120/240 V, 277 Vac

120/240 Vdc

240 Vdc

32 Vdc

1

1

1/4

1/4

1 or 2

2

1

1 or 2

Figure 30.1-7. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)

Figure 30.1-8. Watertight (Cast Aluminum) Figure 30.1-9. Hazardous Location

(Cast Aluminum)

Figure 30.1-10. Flush Plates

13/64 Diameter

2 Mounting Holes

1/2 Diameter Conduit

3 Single Knockouts

1 in Each End & Back

As Shown

Indicating Light

(When Used)

KO

KO

KO

KO

1.56

(39.6)

0.88

(22.4)

0.55

(14.0)

4.16

(105.7)

3.06

(77.7)

2.38

(60.5)

2.11

(53.6)

2.55

(64.8)

1.19

(30.2)

0.73

(18.5)

1.97

(50.0)

Typical Front View

(Single Unit)

Typical Side View

3/4 Inch Pipe Top

5.81

(147.6)

2.91

(73.7)

5.13

(130.3)

0.75

(19.1) 3.63

(92.2)

3/4 Inch Pipe Top

19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole

0.81

(20.6) 0.42

(10.7)

5.88

(149.4)

6.72

(170.7)

3.94

(100.1) 3.50

(88.9)

2.63

(66.8) 0.44

(11.2)

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Mounting Purposes

(2) Holes

Indicating

Light

Handle

Guard

1 Unit

2.75

(69.9)

1.38

(35.1)

1.53

(38.9)

1.64

(41.7)

0.78

(19.8)

0.34

(8.6)

1.52

(38.6)

1.06

(26.9)

0.66

(16.8)

0.31

(7.9)

3.28

(83.3)

1.64

(41.7)

0.22

(5.6)

4.50

(114.3)

2.25

(57.2)

30.1-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type XT

006

XT Manual Motor Protectors

Maximum 50 hp, 600 Volts

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosure

XTPBXENCF40

General Description

XTPB (pushbutton) and XTPR (toggle)

are an economical and global solution

to manual starting. They have a full

spectrum of accessories nd enclosures

to meet various application needs.

They can be utilized in single- and

three-phase applications. They feature

thermal protection with built-in over-

loads, bi-metalic and electronic.

Table 30.1-3. XTP Ratings

Frame

Size

Maximum Horsepower

115

Vac

200

Vac

240

Vac

480

Vac

600

Vac

Single-Phase AC (see Wiring Diagram)

XTPB-B 2 3 5 — —

XTPR-B 2 3 5 — —

XTPR-D 3 5 10 — —

Three-Pole, Three-Phase AC

XTPB-B — 5 7.5 15 20

XTPR-B — 7.5 10 20 25

XTPR-D — 15 15 40 50

Enclosures

■OPEN, IP40, 55, 65, NEMA 1, 3R, 4X,

12, 13

■Red, green and white indicates

available, field installable, without

change in enclosure rating (light is

not UL)

Typical Specifications

Manual starters shall be Eaton’s XT or

approved equal for motors rated not

greater than 50 hp. They shall be built

and tested in accordance with the

applicable IEC and UL standards.

Features and Benefits

■ON/OFF rotary handle with

lockout provision

■Visible trip indication

■Class 10 overload protection

■Phase loss sensitivity

■Ambient temperature compensa-

tion to IEC/EN 60947, VDE 0660

■Fixed short-circuit trip—14 times

maximum setting of overload

FLA dial

■Type 2 coordination per IEC 947

■Identification markers standard on

starter faceplate

■Motor applications from 0.1 A to 65 A

■Built-in heater and magnetic trip

elements to protect the motor

■Adjustment dial for setting

motor FLA

■DIN rail mount

■Terminal types available:

❑Screw terminals

❑Screw (line) and spring cage

(load) terminals

❑Spring cage terminals

■Accessories include:

❑Front and side auxiliary contacts

❑Trip indicating contacts

❑Tamperproof cover for OLR dial

❑Undervoltage release

❑Shunt trip

❑Through-the-door operators

❑Enclosures

❑Three-phase side connecting links

Standards and Certifications

■CE approved

■UL listed File No. E245398

■UL 508 group motor and Type E

compliant

■IEC/EN 60947

■CSA File 229767, Class 3211-05

■DIN VDE 0660 Part 100, Part 101 and

Part 102

Product Selection

When ordering, specify catalog

numbers according to the following

stipulations:

■XT manual motor protectors are

selected based on the overload

current range required for a given

motor. This current range is deter-

mined from the motor full load

ampere rating and motor service

factor usually found on the motor

nameplate.

■For motors with service factors

less than 1.15, multiply the

motor FLA by 0.90 to select

appropriate MMP.

Example: For motor having FLA

of 6.4 A and service factor of 1.0

(6.4 A x 0.90 = 5.76 A) select catalog

number XTPB6P3B01.

See Application Note AP03402001E.

■For motor with service factor of

1. 15 o r g r e a t e r, use motor

nameplate full load amperes to

select the appropriate MMP.

Example: For motor having FLA of

11 A and Service factor of 1.15, select

catalog number XTPR012BC1.

Figure 30.1-11. XTPB, XTPR Single- and

Two-Pole Circuits with DC and AC Current

135

246

I > I > I >

135

246

I > I > I >

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.1-5

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type XT

007

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.1-4. XT Manual Motor Protector Catalog Numbering System

Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.1-12. Manual Motor Protectors—XTPB Figure 30.1-13. Manual Motor Protectors, Manual Transformer

Protectors—XTPR…B

Figure 30.1-14. Manual Motor Protector—XTPR…DC1

XT PR 012 BC1

Type

PB = Manual motor

protector—pushbutton

PR = Manual motor

protector—rotary

Designation

XT = XT IEC power control

Trip Class

C1 = Class 10

Frame Size

B= 45 mm

D= 55 mm

Current Ratings

Frame B

P16 = 0.16 A

P25 = 0.25 A

P40 = 0.40 A

P63 = 0.63 A

001 = 1 A

1P6 = 1.6 A

2P5 = 2.5 A

004 = 4 A

6P3 = 6.3 A

010 = 10 A

012 = 12 A

016 = 16 A

020 = 20 A

025 = 25 A

032 = 32 A

Frame D

016 = 16 A

025 = 25 A

032 = 32 A

040 = 40 A

050 = 50 A

058 = 58 A

063 = 63 A

0.22

(5.5)

1.77

(45.0)

1.77

(45.0)

3.66

(93.0)

1.73

(44.0)

2.91 (74.0)

3.35 (85.0)

XTPAXFA _XTPAXFA _

1.77

(45.0)

3.66

(93.0) 1.77

(45.0)

1.97

(50.0)

3.46 (88.0)

3.70 (94.0)

XTPAXFA _

XTPAXFA _

1.18

(30.0) 0.30 (7.5)

4.65 (118.0)

5.00 (127.0)

5.71 (145.0)

6.73 (171.0)

2.17 (55.0)

5.12

(130.0)

5.57

(140.0)

4.92

(125.0)

2.56

(65.0)

1.77

(45.0)

0.16 (4.0)

XTPAXFA _

XTPAXFA _

30.1-6

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactor—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Manual Motor Control

Type XT

008

Dimensions

Figure 30.1-15. Frame B (0.1–32 A) XTPR

Rotary Manual Motor Protectors

H x W x D

6.30 x 3.94 x 5.12

(160.0 x 100.0 x 130.0)

Figure 30.1-16. Frame B (0.1–32 A) XTPR

Rotary Manual Motor Protectors with

XTPAXFAEM20 Early-Make Front-Mount

Auxiliary Contact

H x W x D

6.30 x 3.94 x 5.12

(160.0 x 100.0 x 130.0)

Figure 30.1-17. XTPB Pushbutton Manual

Motor Protectors

H x W x D

5.08 x 3.55 x 4.54

(129.0 x 90.2 x 115.2)

Figure 30.1-18. XTPB Pushbutton Manual

Motor Protectors

H x W x D

6.22 x 3.15 x 4.59

(158.0 x 80.0 x 116.5)

Figure 30.1-19. Frame D (10–65 A) Rotary

Motor Protective Circuit Breakers

H x W x D

9.45 x 6.30 x 7.76

(240.0 x 160.0 x 197.0)

Wiring Diagrams

MMP Tripping Characteristics

Figure 30.1-20. XTPB, XTPR Frame B

Figure 30.1-21. XTPR Frame D

2

5

20

50

200

1

2

5

10

20

40

1

2

5

10

20

2h

1.5 2346810 15 20 30

XTPB, XTPR Frame B

XTPT

Seconds

Milli-seconds Minutes

x Rated Operational Current

XTPR Frame D

2

5

20

50

200

1

2

5

10

20

40

1

2

5

10

20

2h

1.5 2346810 15 20 30

Seconds

Milli-seconds Minutes

x Rated Operational Current

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-1

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Non-Combination Lighting Contactors

009

Non-Combination

Lighting Contactors

60 Ampere, Five-Pole Electrically Held

30 Ampere, 12-Pole Mechanically Held

30 Ampere, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched

General Description

Lighting contactors are designed to

provide a safe, convenient means for

local or remote switching of tungsten

(incandescent filament) or ballast

(fluorescent and mercury arc) lamp

loads. They are also suitable for other

loads such as low pressure and high

pressure sodium lamp loads and

other non-motor (resistive) loads.

They are not recommended for

most sign flashing loads.

These lighting contactors are designed

to withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten lamp loads with-

out contact welding. The full family

of lighting contactors does not require

derating.

Application Description

Loads:

Ballast Lamps—Fluorescent, mercury

vapor, metal halide sodium vapor,

quartz—600 V maximum.

Filament Lamps

—Incandescent, infra-

red,

heating—480 V maximum, line-to-

line; 277 V maximum line-to-neutral.

Resistance Heating—Radiant and

convection heating, furnaces and ovens.

Typical Specifications

Electrically Held Lighting Contactors—

Eaton’s CN35 or approved equal are

rated for lighting loads of 10–300 A.

They are built and tested in accordance

with applicable NEMA standards.

Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors—

Eaton’s C30CNM or approved equal are

rated for lighting loads of 30 A. They

shall be capable of being supplied in

a 2–12 pole single unit configuration.

These contactors are designed to with-

stand the large initial inrush currents

of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as

well as non-motor (resistive) loads

without contacts welding. The contac-

tor is capable of being operated such

that it will not switch to “OFF” during

the control power circuit power failures.

Magnetically Latched Lighting

Contactors—A202 or approved equal

are rated for lighting loads of 30–

4000 A. Magnetically latched enclosed

combination lighting contactors are

Type ECL12 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible)

or approved equal for loads up to

30–200 A when integral short-circuit

protection is required.

These contactors are designed

to withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten and ballast lamp

loads as well as non-motor (resistive)

loads without contacts welding.

The contactors are capable of being

“mechanically held” via a magnetic

latch design using a permanent

magnet. The contactor is operated

by a RUN signal and a STOP signal

preventing the contactor from switch-

ing to “OFF” during control circuit

power failure.

Table 30.2-1. Lighting Contactor Comparison

Ampere

Rating

Number

of Poles

Electrically

Held

Mechanically

Held

Magnetically

Latched

10

20

30

2, 3, 4

2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12

CN35

CN35

CN35

—

—

—

—

—

—

30

30

60

1–12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

C30CNE

—

—

C30CNM

—

—

—

A202

A202

60

100

100

200

2, 3, 4, 5

2, 3, 4, 5

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

CN35

CN35

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

A202

A202

200

300

300

400

2, 3, 4, 5

2, 3, 4, 5

2, 3

2, 3

CN35

CN35

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

A202

A202

30.2-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Electrically Held—CN35

010

CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed)

20 Ampere

60 Ampere

General Description

Lighting contactors are designed to han-

dle the switching of tungsten (incandes-

cent filament) or ballast (fluorescent and

mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other

non-motor (resistive) loads. Ratings of

10–400 A, 1–12 poles, open or NEMA 1,

3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosed.

Application Description

Loads:

Ballast Lamps—Fluorescent,

mercury vapor, sodium vapor,

quartz—600 V maximum.

Filament Lamps—Incandescent,

infrared, heating—480 V maximum.

Resistance Heating—Radiant

and convection heating, furnaces

and ovens.

Cover Control—See Enclosed

Control Product Guide PG.3.02.T.E

start-stop and hand-off-auto only.

Enclosures

Open, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12.

Auxiliary Contacts

Eaton’s CN35 lighting contactors

include a NO maintaining auxiliary

contact mounted on right-hand side

(on 10 A, two- and three-pole devices,

auxiliary contact occupies 4th power

pole position—no increase in width).

Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary

contact only on the right-hand contactor.

The 10–60 A devices will accept addi-

tional auxiliary contacts on the top

and/or sides. The 100–400 A sizes will

accept side-mounted auxiliaries only.

Typical Specifications

Electrically-held lighting contactors

are Eaton Type CN35 or ELC03, or

approved equal for lighting loads of

10–300 A. They are built and tested

in accordance with applicable

NEMA standards.

These contactors are designed to

withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten and ballast lamp

loads as well as non-motor (resistive)

loads without contact welding. Contac-

tors are capable of accepting up to 8

auxiliary contacts—top and/or side

up to 60 A and side only up to 400 A.

Contactors are capable of being

operated by AC or DC control.

Table 30.2-2. Ratings—CN35 AC Lighting

Contactors—Electrically Held

1Listed ampere ratings are based on a maxi-

mum load voltage of 480 V for tungsten

lamp applications and 600 V for ballast or

mercury vapor type applications.

2Additional power poles mounted on side(s)

of contactor.

Figure 30.2-1. Open Type

Figure 30.2-2. Open Type, 20–30 A Sizes,

Four–Six Poles

Figure 30.2-3. Open Type, 20–30 A Sizes,

Four–Six Poles

3See “Auxiliary Contacts” for type and

location of auxiliary contacts supplied.

Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

4Center mounting slot at bottom on 10–30 A sizes only.

Maximum

Ampere Rating 1

Number

of Poles

10

20

30

60

100, 200, 300

400

2, 3, 4

2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12

2, 3, 4 2, 5 2

2, 3, 4, 5

2, 3

GG

A

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Side

Mtd.

Aux.

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Mtg. Holes for

#10-32 Screws Auxiliary

Contacts√

A

U

X

A

U

X

D

F

C

B

E

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Side

Mtd.

Aux.

3 Mtg. Holes

for #10-32

Screws Auxiliary

Contacts√

AGF

C

A

U

X

E

D

B

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Top

Mtd.

Aux.

Side

Mtd.

Aux.

3 Mtg. Holes

for #10-32

Screws Auxiliary

Contacts√

AGF

C

A

U

X

E

D

B

Ampere

Rating

Number

of Poles

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Wide

A

High

B

Deep

C

Mounting F G

D 4E

Open Type

10

20–30

20–30

20–30

20–30

2–4

2–3

4–6

9

12

2.00 (50.8)

2.00 (50.8)

4.20 (106.7)

10.50 (266.7)

10.50 (266.7)

3.88 (98.5)

3.88 (98.5)

4.35 (110.5)

5.75 (146.0)

5.75 (146.0)

3.49 (88.6)

3.49 (88.6)

3.52 (89.4)

4.52 (114.8)

4.52 (114.8)

1.50 (38.1)

1.50 (38.1)

3.50 (88.9)

4.50 (114.3)

4.50 (114.3)

3.38 (85.9)

3.38 (85.9)

3.86 (98.0)

5.00 (127.0)

5.00 (127.0)

4.90 (124.5)

4.90 (124.5)

4.90 (124.5)

—

—

0.54 (13.7)

0.54 (13.7)

0.54 (13.7)

—

—

1.4 (0.63)

1.45 (0.65)

2.9 (1.3)

4.35 (1.96)

5.8 (2.6)

60

60

60

100

200

300

2–3

4

5

2–3

2–3

2–3

2.56 (65.1)

3.46 (87.8)

4.36 (110.7)

3.54 (89.9)

7.05 (179.1)

7.05 (179.1)

5.05 (128.3)

5.05 (128.3)

5.05 (128.3)

7.17 (182.1)

9.11 (231.4)

13.12 (333.2)

4.44 (112.8)

4.44 (112.8)

4.44 (112.8)

5.94 (150.9)

7.25 (184.2)

7.78 (184.2)

2.00 (50.8)

2.00 (50.8)

2.00 (50.8)

3.00 (76.2)

6.00 (152.4)

6.00 (152.4)

4.50 (114.3)

4.50 (114.3)

4.50 (114.3)

6.63 (168.4)

8.50 (215.9)

12.50 (317.5)

5.80 (147.3)

5.80 (147.3)

5.80 (147.3)

—

—

—

0.54 (13.7)

0.54 (13.7)

0.54 (13.7)

0.54 (13.7)

—

—

3.4 (1.53)

3.5 (1.57)

3.55 (1.59)

9 (4.1)

20 (9.0)

23 (10.35)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-3

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Electrically Held—CN35

011

Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.2-4. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting

Contactors—Electrically Held—CN35

Table 30.2-5. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination

Lighting Contactors—Electrically Held—CN35

Table 30.2-6. Type 1 Combination

Lighting Contactors

Table 30.2-7. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination

Lighting Contactors

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Contactors—without Control Power Transformers

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5 (2.3)

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)

w/top adders

2 7.3 (3.3)

10 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3)

20 A (2P, 3P) 1 5.2 (2.4)

20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)

w/top adders &

6P w/o top adder

2 7.3 (3.3)

20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9 (4.1)

20 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.3 (4.2)

30 A (2P, 3P) 1 5.3 (2.4)

30 A

(2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders

2 7.3 (3.3)

30 A (5P, 6P) 3 9.0 (4.1)

30 A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 9.2 (4.2)

30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3)

30 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.7 (4.4)

60 A (2P, 3P) 1 7 (3.2)

60 A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 9.8 (4.4)

60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 9.5 (4.3)

60 A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 10 (4.5)

100 A (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16)

100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 60 (27)

200 A (2P, 3P) 4 70 (32)

200 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 133 (60)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)

300 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 136 (62)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)

Contactors—with Control Power Transformers

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 11 (5.0)

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P, 9P,

10P, 12P, 20P) w/top

adders

313.1 (5.9)

20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 6P) 2 11 (5.0)

20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/top

adders

313.1 (5.9)

20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.5 (6.1)

20 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1)

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4)

30 A

(2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders

313.1 (5.9)

30 A (5P, 6P) 2 12.5 (5.7)

30 A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1)

30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.9 (6.3)

30 A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 14.1 (6.4)

60 A (2P, 3P) 2 12.8 (5.8)

60 A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 14 (6.4)

60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 14 (6.4)

60 A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 14.2 (6.4)

100 A (2P, 3P) 4 39 (18)

100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 67 (30)

200 A (2P, 3P) 10 117 (53)

200 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 140 (64)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)

300 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 143 (65)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Contactors—without Control Power Transformers

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 5 12 (5.4)

10 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)

20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 12 (5.4)

20 A (6P) 5 14 (6.4)

20 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9)

30 A (5P, 6P) 6 14 (6.4)

30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)

60 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9)

60 A (5P, 6P) 6 16 (7.3)

60 A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)

100 A (2P, 3P) 8 49 (22)

100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 57 (26)

200 A (2P, 3P) 8 110 (50)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 57)

Contactors—with Control Power Transformers

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 5 16 (7.3)

10 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9)

20 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 16 (7.3)

20 A (6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11)

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 6 18 (8.2)

30 A (5P, 6P) 6 18 (8.2)

30 A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11)

60 A (2P, 3P) 6 21 (10)

60 A (4P, 5P, 6P) 6 23 (10)

60 A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)

100 A (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25)

100 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 64 (29)

200 A (2P, 3P) 8 117 (53)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)

Ampere Size Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Electrically Held—3P Only—with or without

Control Power Transformers

30 A A 35 (16)

60 A A 36 (16)

100 A C 65 (30)

200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)

200 A with thermal-magnetic

breaker

E 150 (68)

300 A E 160 (73)

400 A E 170 (77)

Ampere Size

(Device)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Electrically Held—3P Only—with or without

Control Power Transformers

30 A A 35 (16)

60 A A 36 (16)

100 A C 65 (30)

200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)

200 A with thermal-magnetic

breaker

E 150 (68)

300 A E 160 (73)

400 A E 170 (77)

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

30.2-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Electrically Held—Technical Data—CN35

012

Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data

Table 30.2-9. DC Magnet Coil Data

■UL Insulation Rating—Class 130 (B),

105°C temperature rise

■Operational Limits—85–110%

of rated voltage for AC coils and

80%–110% of rated voltage for

DC coils

Coil Data Notes

P.U. = Pickup time is the average time

taken from closing of the coil

circuit to main contact touch.

D.O. = Dropout time is the average

time taken from opening of

the coil circuit to main contact

separation.

Cold = Coil data with a cold coil.

Hot = Coil data with a hot coil.

All data is based on a standard

contactor with no auxiliary devices

and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.

Coil data has a ±5% range depending

on the application, therefore specific

data may vary.

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size

CN35AN

10 A

CN35BN

20 A

CN35DN

30 A

CN35GN

60 A

CN35KN

100 A

CN35NN

200 A

CN35SN

300 A

CN35TN

400 A

Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm

AC Magnet Coil Data

Pickup volts—cold

Pickup volts—hot

Pickup voltamperes

Pickup watts

Sealed voltamperes

Sealed watts

74%

78%

100

65

10

3.1

74%

78%

100

65

10

3.1

74%

78%

100

65

10

3.1

74%

78%

230

95

28

7. 8

72%

76%

390

11 2

49.8

13

75%

77%

11 5 8

240

100

27.2

75%

77%

11 5 8

240

100

27.2

75%

77%

11 5 8

240

100

27.2

Dropout volts—cold

Dropout volts—hot

Pickup time (ms)

Dropout time (ms)

45%

46%

12

12

45%

46%

12

12

45%

46%

12

12

49%

50%

20

14

50%

52%

14

11

63%

64%

23

15

63%

64%

23

15

63%

64%

23

15

Coil operating range –15% to +10%

Magnet coil data

UL listed rating

Class 130 (B)—105 °C Temperature Rate

Operating temperature –20 °C to +65 °C

Maximum operating

altitude

6000

Mechanical life 20,000,000 10,000,000 6,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000

Wire Range

Power terminals 12–16

stranded,

12–14 solid

Cu

12–16

stranded,

12–14 solid

Cu

8–16

stranded

10 –14 solid

Cu

3–14 (upper) &/or

6–14 (lower)

Stranded or solid

Cu

1/0–14 Cu 350 kcmil–6 Cu 350 kcmil–8 Cu 600 kcmil–2/0 Cu

Control Terminals 12–16 Stranded

12–14 Solid Cu

Contact Kit Part No.

Two-po le

Three-Pole

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

6-65-7

6-65-8

6-43-5

6-43-6

6-44

6-44-2

6-45

6-45-2

6-45

6-45-2

Auxiliary contact

rating

A600, P300

See Page 30.2-5

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size

CN35AN

10 A

CN35BN

20 A

CN35DN

30 A

CN35GN

60 A

CN35KN

100 A

CN35NN

200 A

CN35SN

300 A

CN35TN

400 A

Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm

Volts 24 V

DC Magnet Coil Data

Pickup volts—hot

Pickup voltamperes

Pickup watts

Sealed voltamperes

Sealed watts

80%

3.2

76.8

0.14

3.36

80%

3.2

76.8

0.14

3.36

80%

3.2

76.8

0.14

3.36

60%

6.2

88.4

0.21

4.96

61%

12.0

288.0

0.20

4.75

61%

12.0

288.0

0.20

4.75

61%

12.0

288.0

0.20

4.75

67%

18

400.0

0.22

5.3

Dropout volts—hot

Pickup time (ms)

Dropout time (ms)

60%

22

17

60%

22

17

60%

22

17

29%

20

13

22%

38

14

22%

38

14

22%

38

14

25%

53

14

Maximum operating

altitude

3600 2400

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-5

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Mechanically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNM

013

Type C30CNM—Open

(ECC—Enclosed)

C30CNM

General Description

Eaton’s C30CNM 30 A mechanically

held lighting contactors are designed

for industrial, commercial and outdoor

lighting applications where efficient

control is required. The mechanically

held operation ensures that the con-

tactor will not switch to OFF during

control power failure. It also ensures

the removal of coil from the circuit for

noise-free operation and the elimination

of all coil losses after the contactor is

latched. The control module micropro-

cessor validates the control signal

before operation, so it will not respond

to momentary voltage spikes of noise.

The operation command has a built-in

0.4 second delay to avoid multiple

short-term commands that can cause

contact fatigue or failure. Also, the

feedback loop prevents the contactor

from getting out of sequence with

switches, even after power failures.

Typical Specifications

Mechanically held lighting contactors

are Eaton Type C30CNM or approved

equal and are rated for lighting loads

of 30 A. They are capable of being

supplied in a 2–12 pole single unit

configuration.

These contactors are designed to with-

stand the large initial inrush currents of

tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well

as non-motor (resistive) loads without

contact welding. The contactor is capable

of being operated such that it will not

switch to OFF during control circuit

power failures.

Operation

Three-wire control is the choice for use

with momentary devices allowing

operation from multiple locations. A

momentary pulse of energy operates

the contactor while a second pulse on

an alternate leg returns the contactor

to its original state.

Two-wire control is the choice for single

output automatic operation or for

operation from single-pole devices.

When voltage is applied to the input

terminals the contactor is latched into

position (coil is removed from the circuit

while control voltage is continuously

supplied). When control voltage is re-

moved, the latch is disengaged and the

contactor is returned to its original state.

Technical Data and Specifications

Main Power Poles

Table 30.2-10. Maximum AC Voltage and

Ampere Ratings

Table 30.2-11. Maximum Horsepower Rating

Table 30.2-12. Control Module

Table 30.2-13. Other Control Module

Characteristics

Auxiliary Contacts Rating:

■600 A, 24 Vdc, 24 VA

Ambient Temperature:

■–13 °F to +104 °F (–25 °C to +40 °C)

Mounting Position:

■Vertical three-point mounting only

Coil:

■Inrush 248 VA

■Sealed 28 VA

Wire Size

Table 30.2-14. Wire Specifications

18 AWG stranded only.

Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.2-15. Type 1 Non-combination

Lighting Contactors—C30CN 2

2Consult factory for combination enclosures.

Table 30.2-16. Type 3R, 4X and 12 Non-

combination Lighting Contactors—C30CN 3

3Consult factory for combination enclosures.

Load

Ty p e

Amps

Continuous

Poles

Single-

Phase

Three-

Phase

Ballast 30 347 Vac 600 Vac

General use 30 600 Vac 600 Vac

Tungsten 20 277 Vac 480 Vac

AC resistive 30 600 Vac 600 Vac

Normal Starting Duty

Volts Horsepower

Single-Pole, Single-Phase

110 – 1 2 0

220–240

1

2

Three-Pole, Three-Phase

200–208

220–240

440–480

550–600

3

5

10

15

Input

Voltage

Steady-State

Current at Rated

Voltage (mA)

Maximum

VA

12–24 Vdc 42 2

24 Vac 80 5

115–120 Vac 83 12

200–277 Vac 91 30

Description Specification

Minimum pulse duration

(Three-wire control module)

250 ms

Maximum allowable

Leakage current

1.8 mA

EMI 35 V/m

Surge transient peak 6 kV

Frequency range 40–70 Hz

Component Number

of

Cables

Wire Range

(Solid or

Stranded)

Wire

Te m p .

Power

Poles

1 14–8 AWG 75 ºC Cu

214–8 AWG 175 ºC Cu

Coil 1 or 2 18–14 AWG 60 /75 ºC

Cu

Control

Module

1 22–12 AWG 60º/75 ºC

Cu

Auxiliary

Contacts

1 or 2 22–12 AWG 60/75 ºC

Cu

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Lighting Contactors—

without Control Power Transformers

30 A (2–12) 2 9 (4.1)

Lighting Contactors—

with Control Power Transformers

30 A (2–12) 3 13.5 (5.9)

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Lighting Contactors—

without Control Power Transformers

30 A (2–12) 6 14 (6.4)

Lighting Contactors—

with Control Power Transformers

30 A (2–12) 7 20 (9.1)

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

30.2-6

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Mechanically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNM

014

Components

Electrically Held Base Contactor

Electrically Held Base Contactor

The C30CNE20_0 electrically held base

contactor contains a 2NO power pole

as standard and will allow the addition

of power poles to build an electrically

held contactor up to 12 poles maximum.

A mechanically held module kit can

also be added to convert the electrically

held contactor into a mechanically held

contactor in the field.

Table 30.2-17. Electrically Held Base Contactor

1When ordering, select required contactor

by Catalog Number and replace the magnet

coil alpha designation in the Catalog

Number (...) with the proper Code Suffix

from Table 30.2-18.

Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)

Power

Poles

Catalog

Number 1

2NO C30CNE200

Voltage

(Digit 8)

Code

Suffix

115–120 V 60 Hz/110 V 50 Hz

230–240 V 60 Hz/220 V 50 Hz

460–480 V 60 Hz/440 V 50 Hz

575–600 V 60 Hz/550 V 50 Hz

200–208 V 60 Hz

A

B

C

D

E

265–277 V 60 Hz/240 V 50 Hz

24 V 60 Hz/20 V 50 Hz

28 V 60Hz/24 V 50 Hz

347 V 60 Hz

H

T

V

X

Power Poles

Power Poles

The C30CNM contactor accepts up to a

maximum six single- or double-pole

(or combinations) power poles. These

can be used to form up to:

■12NO poles maximum when six

double-poles are used in NO positions

(1–6) or 8NC poles maximum with

four double-poles in the NC position

(1–4) and 4NO poles with two double-

poles in the 2NO positions (5–6)

Table 30.2-19. Power Poles

Mechanically Held Module Kits

Conversion Kits

These kits are for converting electri-

cally held contactors to mechanically

held units. Kits include control mod-

ule, latch, latch cover and auxiliary

contacts plus installation instructions.

Conversion kits are suitable for coil

voltages of 277 V and below.

Table 30.2-20. Mechanically Held Module Kits

Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM Components—Exploded View

Power

Poles

Catalog

Number

Single-pole

Double-pole

C320PRP1

C320PRP2

Coil

Volt s

Control

Vol ts

Catalog

Number

Two-Wire

24–277 Vac 110–120 Vac

200–277 Vac

24 Vac

12–24 Vdc

C320MH2WA0

C320MH2WH0

C320MH2WT0

C320MH2WT1

Three-Wire

24–277 Vac 110–120 Vac

200–277 Vac

24 Vac

12–24 Vdc

C320MH3WA0

C320MH3WH0

C320MH3WT0

C320MH3WT1

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-7

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Mechanically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNM

015

Auxiliary Contacts

Auxiliary Contacts

A mechanically held contactor with

a two-wire control module uses 1NC

auxiliary contact as standard for the

control wiring circuit. The mechanically

held contactor with a three-wire control

module uses 1NO–1NC auxiliary

contacts as standard for the control

wiring circuit. See Ta b l e 3 0 . 2 - 2 1 for

possible additional auxiliary contact

configurations.

Table 30.2-21. Auxiliary Contact Configurations

Table 30.2-22. Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Replacement Parts

Magnetic Coils for the Base Contactor

Magnetic Coils

Table 30.2-23. Magnetic Coils

Wiring Diagrams

Figure 30.2-5. C30CNM Wiring Diagram

Two-Wire Three-Wire

None

1NO (single-pole)

2NO (double-pole)

None

1NC (double-pole)

1NO (double-pole)

1NC (double-pole)

1NO–1NC

(NO single-pole

NC double-pole)

2NO–1NC

(double pole)

1NO–1NC (double-pole)

—

—

Auxiliary

Block

Catalog

Number

Single-pole

Double-pole

C320AMH1

C320AMH2

Coil

Volt age

Catalog

Number

115–120 V 60 Hz/110 V 50 Hz

230–240 V 60 Hz/220 V 50 Hz

460–480 V 60 Hz/440 V 50 Hz

575–600 V 60 Hz/550 V 50 Hz

200–208 V 60 Hz

9-3242-1

9-3242-2

9-3242-3

9-3242-4

9-3242-5

265–277 V 60 Hz/240 V 50 Hz

24 V 60 Hz/20 V 50 Hz

28 V 60 Hz/24 V 50 Hz

347 V 60 Hz

9-3242-6

9-3242-7

9-3242-8

9-3242-9

1

2

Line Load

3

4

5

6

C30CNE Electrically Held

View A

CONTROL

Refer to View “B” for Control Connections

Optional

Auxiliary

Contacts

Optional

Auxiliary

Contacts

A1 A2

Coil

Coil

Voltage

ON and OFF Pushbuttons

View B

Optional Pilot Devices for Electrically Held Contactor

O

FF AUTO

SS

* If Used

O

FF

O

N

AUTO

A1

L2L1

A2

*

Fuse

*Fuse

Remote

OFF

Remote

ON

ON

ON

Pushbutton

OFF

Pushbutton

OFF

Coil

Auxiliary

ContactAuxiliary

Contact

OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch

A1

L2L1

A2

*

Fuse

*Fuse

Remote

Device

ON

OFF

Coil

Auxiliary

Contact

OFF/ON/AUTO or HAND/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch

A1

L2L1

A2

*

Fuse

*Fuse

Remote

Device

ON

OFF

Coil

Auxiliary

Contact

30.2-8

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Mechanically Held, 30 A, 2–12 Pole—C30CNM

016

Figure 30.2-6. C30CNM Wiring Diagram

Dimensions

Figure 30.2-7. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1

2

Line Load

3

4

5

6

C30CNM Mechanically Held

Refer to View “A” for 2-/3-Wire Control Options

2-WIRE CONTROL

Refer to View “B” for Control Connections

View A

Optional

“N/O”

Aux.

Contacts

Optional

“NC”

Aux.

Contact

P1

A1

C

L

A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

Not Used

P4 P5

Coil

Coil

Voltage

3-WIRE CONTROL

Refer to View “C” for Control Connections

Optional

“N/O”

Aux.

Contacts

Optional

“NC”

Aux.

Contact

P1

A1

L

C

O

A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

P4 P5

Coil

Coil

Voltage

OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch

View B

Optional Pilot Devices for 2-Wire Control

P1

A1A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

P4 P5

Fuse

Fuse

Coil

Voltage

Control

Voltage

O

FF

O

N

(AUTO)

SS

Coil

HAND/OFF/AUTO or ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch

P1

A1A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

P4 P5

Fuse

Fuse

Coil

Voltage

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* If Used

* If Used

Control

Voltage Remote

Device

O

FF

O

N

AUTO

Coil

ON & OFF Pushbuttons

View C

Optional Pilot Devices for 3-Wire Control

P1

A1A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

P4 P5

Fuse

Fuse

Coil

Voltage

Control

Voltage Coil

”NO“

Auxiliary

”NC“

Auxiliary

O

FF

O

N

Remote

O

FF

Remote

O

N

OFF/ON Selector Switch with Spring Return to Center

P1

A1A2

P2 P3

Electronic-Module

P4 P5

Fuse

Fuse

Coil

Voltage

Control

Voltage Coil

”NO“

Auxiliary

”NC“

Auxiliary

ON

OFF

O

FF

O

N

O

FF

O

N

O

FF

O

N

O

FF

O

N

ON ON ON ON ON ON

P1

A1 A2

P2 P3 P4 P5

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5

.35

(9.0)

NOTE:

1 Mounting dimensions remain the same

for 1 to 12 poles.

2 Line and Load terminals are interchangeable.

3 Up to 2NO and 2NC auxiliary contacts can be

added onto the base product.

4 Same power pole can be configured as

NO type or NC type in pole positions 1 – 4;

NO type only in positions 5 – 6.

SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW END VIEW

Power

Pole

Optional

Power

Pole

Optional “NC”

Aux Contacts

Optional “NO”

Aux Contacts

Mounting Holes

Accept

#10 Screws

2 “NO”

Aux

Contacts

1 “NO”

Aux

Contact

2 “NC”

Aux

Contacts

1 “NC”

Aux

Contact

3.86 (98.0)

.35 (9.0)

4.18 (106.2)

3.75 (95.3)

6.50

(165.1)

3.86

(98.0)

.59 (14.9)

7. 3 9

(187.6)

.22 (5.5)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-9

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)—A202

017

A202–Open (ECL04–Enclosed)

60 Ampere Size

General Description

AC lighting contactors provide a safe

convenient means for local or remote

switching of relatively large tungsten,

fluorescent or mercury arc lamp loads.

They are also suitable for low pressure

and high pressure sodium lamp loads.

These lighting contactors are designed

to withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten lamp loads with-

out contact welding. They are full rated

and do not require derating as do stan-

dard motor control contactors.

Operation (Magnetic Latch)

A permanent magnet is built into the

contactor structure that will maintain

the contactor in its energized state

indefinitely without using control

power. When energized, a DC current

is applied to the latch coil producing

a magnetic field that reinforces the

polarity of the permanent magnet,

pulling in the contactor. The current

to the coil is disconnected by the coil

clearing interlock. In order to drop out

the contactor, it is necessary to apply

a field through the STOP coil in the

reverse direction to the permanent

magnet. This momentarily cancels the

magnetic attraction and the contactor

drops out.

Enclosures

Open and NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X and 12.

Specifications

■Te r m i n a l s :

❑All except

30 A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Al/Cu

❑30 A devices . . . . . . . . . . . Cu only

■Ballast load 600 Vac, breaking

all lines

■Tungsten lamp loads, maximum volts:

❑Line-to-line. . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Vac

❑Line-to-neutral. . . . . . . . . 277 Vac

Typical Specifications

Magnetically-held lighting contactors

are Eaton’s Type A202 or approved

equal for lighting loads of 30–400 A.

Magnetically-held combination lighting

contactors are Type ECL15 (breaker) or

ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for

loads of 30–200 A when integral short

circuit protection is required.

These contactors are designed

to withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten and ballast lamp

loads as well as non-motor (resistive)

loads without contacts welding.

The contactors are capable of being

“magnetically held” via a magnetic

latch design using a permanent

magnet. The contactor shall be

operated by a RUN signal and a STOP

signal preventing the contactor from

switching to “OFF” during control

circuit power failures.

Table 30.2-24. Ratings—Latched AC

Lighting Contactors

Table 30.2-25. Non-Combination Lighting Contactors—6 to 12 Pole

Figure 30.2-8. Open Type

Figure 30.2-9. Connection Diagram

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

Holding Circuit Auxiliary Contact or

Pushbutton Station not Included

Continuous Amperes

(Enclosed)

Number

of Poles

30

60

100

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

200

300

400

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

2, 3

2, 3

Continuous

Amperes

(Enclosed)

Number

of Poles

Pole

Configuration

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Open Type

Wide A High B

30 6

8

10

12

3 x 3

4 x 4

5 x 5

4 x 4 x 4

7. 1 3 ( 1 8 1. 1 )

7. 1 3 ( 1 8 1. 1 )

10.63 (270.0)

12.38 (314.5)

4.46 (113.3)

4.46 (113.3)

4.46 (113.3)

6.88 (174.8)

60 6

8

10

12

3 x 3

4 x 4

5 x 5

5 x 5 x 2

7. 1 3 ( 1 8 1. 1 )

10.63 (270.0)

10.63 (270.0)

15.00 (381.0)

4.46 (113.3)

4.46 (113.3)

4.46 (113.3)

6.88 (174.8)

100 6

8

10

12

3 x 3

5 x 3

5 x 5

5 x 5 x 2

9.75 (247.7)

12.38 (314.5)

15.00 (381.0)

34.13 (866.9)

6.88 (174.8)

6.88 (174.8)

6.88 (174.8)

27.50 (698.5)

200 6

8

10

12

3 x 3

5 x 3

5 x 5

5 x 5 x 2

9.75 (247.7)

12.38 (314.5)

15.00 (381.0)

34.13 (866.9)

6.88 (174.8)

6.88 (174.8)

6.88 (174.8)

27.50 (698.5)

C

B

A

Connections for

Control Stations

Elementary Diagram

Separate Control

Connections for Contactor

Front View Diagram

Off

23

1

1

Momentary

Pushbutton

Top

Auxiliary

Contact“C”

(Not Supplied)

L2

Control

Module

Line

When Supplied

Red

Maintained

Pushbutton

Fig. A

On

Off

23

Line

M

Load

Off

Momentary

Pushbutton

1

1

1

3

2

Off On

Maintained

Pushbutton

N.O.

N.C.

Top

Red

White M

M

“C”

L2

Red

Red

Black

Auxiliary

Contact

(When Used)

Connect separate control

lines to the No. 1 terminal

on the remote control

station and to the “L2”

terminal on the contactor.

Auxiliary

Contact

(When Used)

Poles to Load

Black

33

N.C. N.O.

2

2

White

On

Fig. B

Fig. 1

8

8

8

8

8

M

On Off

M

~~

+

–

Red

M

M

M

M

~~

+

–

On

Control Voltage Lines

On

Off

30.2-10

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)—A202

018

Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.2-26. Type 1 Non-combination

Lighting Contactors—Magnetically

Latched—A202

Table 30.2-27. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12

Non-combination Lighting Contactors—

Magnetically Latched—A202

Table 30.2-28. Type 1 Combination Lighting

Contactors

Table 30.2-29. NEMA 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination

Lighting Contactors

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Contactors—without Control Power Transformers

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9)

30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13 (5.9)

30 A (20P) 4 35 (16)

60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.7 (3.9)

60 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13.5 (6.1)

60 A (20P) 4 40 (18)

100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 40 (18)

100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 85 (39)

100 A (20P) 9 100 (45)

200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 46 (21)

200 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 95 (43)

200 A (20P) 9 110 (50)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 115 (52)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)

Contactors—with Control Power Transformers

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.5 (5.7)

30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 17 (7.7)

30 A (20P) 4 39 (18)

60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.7 (5.8)

60 A (6P, 8P, 10P) 3 17.5 (7.9)

60 A (12P) 9 87 (39)

60 A (20P) 4 44 (20)

100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 47 (21)

100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 92 (42)

100 A (20P) 9 107 (49)

200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 53 (24)

200 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 102 (46)

200 A (20P) 9 117 (53)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 122 (55)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)

Ampere Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Contactors—without Control Power Transformers

30 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 13 (5.9)

30 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 21 (10)

30 A (20P) 8 46 (21)

60 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 14 (6.4)

60 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)

60 A (20P) 8 48 (22)

100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 50 (23)

100 A (6P, 8P, 10P,12P) 9 58 (26)

100 A (20P) 10 100 (45)

200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 52 (24)

200 A (20P) 10 105 (48)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)

Contactors—with Control Power Transformers

30 A (2P, 3P) 6 15 (6.8)

30 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 28 (13)

30 A (20P) 8 54 (25)

60 A (2P, 3P) 6 16 (7.3)

60 A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 29 (13)

60 A (20P) 8 55 (25)

100 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 57 (26)

100 A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 65 (30)

100 A (20P) 10 112 (51)

200 A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 59 (27)

300 A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)

400 A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)

Ampere Size Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Magnetically Latched—Non-reversing (3P Only)—

with or without Control Power Transformers

30 A A 35 (16)

60 A A 36 (16)

100 A C 65 (30)

200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)

200 A with thermal-

magnetic breaker

E 150 (68)

300 A E 140 (64)

400 A E 190 (86)

Ampere Size Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Magnetically Latched—Non-reversing (3P Only)—

with or without Control Power Transformers

30 A A 35 (16)

60 A A 36 (16)

100 A C 65 (30)

200 A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)

200 A with thermal-

magnetic breaker

E 150 (68)

300 A with disconnect switch 72” 375 (170)

300 A with thermal-

magnetic breaker

E 160 (73)

400 A with disconnect switch 72” 425 (193)

400 A with thermal-

magnetic breaker

E210 (95)

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.2-11

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole Only—Type ECL

019

Combination Lighting

Contactors

Types ECL12, ECL13, ECL14

and ECL15

General Description

Catalog Number ECL12, ECL13, ECL14

and ECL15 combination lighting con-

tactors offer convenient installation of

switching and overcurrent protection

in a single enclosure. Combination

lighting contactors are ideally suited

for industrial and commercial lighting

applications or where a lighting circuit

may have to be disconnected for peri-

odic maintenance. They may also be

applied on resistance heating loads.

Typical Specifications

Magnetically latched combination

lighting contactors are Eaton’s Type

ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or

approved equal for loads of 30–200 A

when integral short-circuit protection

is required.

These contactors are designed to

withstand the large initial inrush

currents of tungsten and ballast lamp

loads as well as non-motor (resistive)

loads without contact welding. The

contactors are capable of being

“magnetically held” via a magnetic

latch design using a permanent magnet.

The contactor shall be operated by

a RUN signal and a STOP signal

preventing the contactor from switch-

ing to “OFF” during control circuit

power failures.

Electrically held combination lighting

contactors are Eaton Type ECL14

(breaker) or ECL12 (fusible) or

approved equal for loads of 30–400 A

when integral short-circuit protection

is required.

These contactors shall be designed to

withstand the large initial inrush cur-

rents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads

as well as non-motor (resistive) loads

without contact welding. Contactors

shall be capable of accepting up to eight

auxiliary contacts—top and/or side up to

60 A and side only up to 400 A. Contac-

tors shall be capable of being operated

by AC or DC control.

Features

■Disconnect devices—either a

Series C circuit breaker or a fusible

disconnect switch

■Handle mechanism—flange

mounted

■UL listed

■UL service entrance approved for

NEMA 3R outdoor enclosure

■Extra room for modifications such

as a 24-hour time clock

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.2-30. Enclosed Lighting Contactor Catalog Numbering System

1For normally closed poles, see PG03300001E.

2C30CN available in 30 A only.

EC L 12 D 1 A 3 E - X

Design

L= CN35 or A202 lighting contactor

C= C30CN lighting contactor

Class

03 = Non-combination electrically held lighting contactor

04 = Non-combination mechanically held/magnetically

latched lighting contactor

12 = Combination electrically held lighting contactor—

fusible disconnect

13 = Combination magnetically latched lighting

contactor—fusible disconnect

14 = Combination electrically held lighting

contactor—thermal-magnetic circuit breaker

15 = Combination magnetically latched lighting

contactor—thermal-magnetic circuit breaker

Ampere Size 2

A= 10 A

B= 20 A

C= 30 A

D= 60 A

E= 100 A

F= 200 A

G= 300 A

H= 400 A

J= 600 A

Enclosure Types

1 = Type 1—General purpose

2 = Type 3R—Rainproof

3 = Type 4—Watertight (painted)

4 = Type 4X—Watertight (304-grade stainless steel)

6 = Type 7/9—Explosion proof

8 = Type 12—Dust-tight

9 = Type 4X—Watertight (316-grade stainless steel)

Coil Voltage

A= 120/60 110/50

B= 240/60 220/50

C= 480/60 440/50

D= 600/60 550/50

E= 208/60

G= 550/50

H= 277/60

J= 208–240/60

K= 240/50

L= 380/50

M= 415/50

P= 12 Vdc

Q= 24 Vdc

R= 48 Vdc

S= 125 Vdc

T= 24/60

U= 24/50

V= 32/50

W= 48/60

X= 104–120/60

Y= 48/50

Z= By description

Modification Codes

(See PG03300001E)

Number of Poles 1

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Poles required

A = 10 Poles

B = 12 Poles

C = 20 Poles

Combination Devices = Three-pole only

Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings

A= None

B= 30 A/250 V R

C= 30 A/600 V R

D= 60 A/250 V R

E= 30 A/600 V R

F= 100 A/250 V R

G= 100 A/600 V R

H= 200 A/250 V R

J= 200 A/600 V R

K= 400 A/250 V R

L= 400 A/600 V R

M= 600 A/250 V R

N= 600 A/600 V R

P= 800 A/600 V R

T= By description

Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Ratings

A= None

D= 20 A

E= 30 A

F= 60 A

G= 100 A

H= 200 A

J= 300 A

K= 400 A

L= 600 A

M= 800 A

T= By description

30.2-12

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Lighting Contactors

E

lectrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole Only—Type ECL

020

Table 30.2-31. Ratings—Latched ELC15

Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect

Table 30.2-32. ELC13—Fusible Disconnect

Switch

Table 30.2-33. Ratings—Electrically-held

ELC14 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect

1UL ballast and resistive ratings only.

Table 30.2-34. ELC12—Fusible

Disconnect Switch

2UL ballast and resistive ratings only.

Continuous

Amperes

(Enclosed)

Circuit Breaker

Ampere

Rating

System

Voltage

30

60

100

200

30

60

100

200

600

600

600

600

Continuous

Amperes

(Enclosed)

Fuse Clip

Ampere

Rating

System

Vol ta ge

30

60

100

200

30

60

100

200

250, 600

250, 600

250, 600

250, 600

Continuous

Amperes

(Enclosed)

Circuit Breaker

Ampere

Rating

System

Voltage

30

60

100

30

60

100

600

600

600

200

300

400 1

200

300

400

600

600

600

Continuous

Amperes

(Enclosed)

Fuse Clip

Ampere

Rating

System

Volta ge

30

60

100

30

60

100

250, 600

250, 600

250, 600

200

300

400 2

200

300

400

250, 600

250, 600

250, 600

Table 30.2-35. Factory Modifications

Description Enclosure Used On

Standard Combination

Control transformers:

480 to 120 V control transformer

100 VA extra capacity transformer

200 VA extra capacity transformer

240 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder

208 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder

415 to 110 V control transformer with fuse in holder

277 to 120 V control transformer with fuse in holder

Any

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Lightning arrester

Undervoltage relay

On-off pushbutton

Hand-off-auto selector switch

Any

■

■

■

■

Addition of photoelectric receptacle and relay with

photo cell Installed (two-wire circuit)

—

■■

24-hour time clock, 120 V

24-hour time clock with day omission, 120 V

7-day time clock, 120 V

Cover plate for use in place of watertight hub on enclosure top

—■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-1

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—General Description

021

NEMA Motor Starters

Freedom Series

NEMA AN19DN0A5E005

NEMA Size 1

General Description

The Freedom Series starters and

contactors listed in this catalog

feature a compact, space-saving

design and high strength, impact

and temperature-resistant insulating

materials. Starters and contactors

are available in the NEMA (National

Electrical Manufacturers’ Association)

style. The NEMA devices are sized

based on traditional NEMA

classifications.

Features

Freedom NEMA

■Adjustable bimetallic ambient

compensated overload relays

with interchangeable heater

packs—available in three basic sizes,

covering applications up to 900 hp—

reducing the number of different

contactor/overload relay combina-

tions that have to be stocked. Fixed

heater overloads are optional

■Electronic overload relay (C440)

available as a stand-alone unit

and assembled with a Freedom

contactor

■A full line of snap-on accessories—

top and side mounted auxiliary

contacts, solid-state and pneumatic

timers, etc.

■Straight-through wiring—line lugs

at top, load lugs at bottom

■Horizontal or vertical mounting

on upright panel for application

freedom

■Screw type power terminals have

captive, backed-out self-lifting

pressure plates with ± screws—

reduced wiring time

■Accessible terminals for easy wiring.

Optional fingerproof shields avail-

able to prevent electrical shock

■Top located coil terminals conve-

nient and readily accessible. 45 mm

contactor magnet coils have three

terminals, permitting either top or

diagonal wiring—easy to replace

European or U.S. style starters

or contactors without changing

wiring layout

■Designed to meet or exceed NEMA,

UL, CSA, VDE, BS and other interna-

tional standards and listings

■American engineering—built by

Eaton, using the latest in statistical

process control methods to pro-

duce high quality, reliable products

■Sized based on standard NEMA

classifications

■Easy coil change and inspectable/

replaceable contacts

■Available in open and NEMA Type 1,

3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosures

Standards and Certifications

■Standard: Designed to meet or

exceed UL, NEMA and CSA

■UL listed: UL File #E1491, Guide

#NLDX—Open; UL File #E176513—

Enclosed Combination Motor Con-

trollers; UL File #E19224—Enclosed

Non-Combination Motor Controllers;

UL File #E195239—Enclosed Power

Conversion Equipment

■CSA certified: CSA File #LR353,

Class #321104 Open and NEMA 1

Enclosed

Certified Type 2 Coordination

Eaton’s Freedom Series NEMA start-

ers are now UL certified to achieve IEC

947 Type 2 coordination against

100,000 A short-circuit fault currents.

Any brand of properly selected fuse

can be used. Type 2 coordination

means that the starter will be suitable

for further use following a short-circuit

fault.

Short-Circuit Protection

Fuses and inverse-time circuit breakers

may be selected per Article 430, Part D

of the National Electrical Code® to

protect motor branch circuits from

fault conditions. If higher ratings or

settings are required to start the motor,

do not exceed the maximum as listed

in Exception No. 2, Article 430.52.

30.3-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA Contactors and Starters

022

Technical Data

NEMA Sizes 00-8

Table 30.3-1. AC Coil Data

General Coil Data

■Coil Offering—tape wound:

❑NEMA Sizes 00–0

❑UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)

■Coil Offering—encapsulated:

❑NEMA Sizes 1–3

❑UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)

■Coil Offering—encapsulated:

❑NEMA Sizes 4–5

❑UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)

■Operational Limits:

❑85% to 110% of rated voltage—AC

❑80% to 110% of rated voltage—DC

Table 30.3-2. Coil Data Notes

All data is based on a standard

contactor with no auxiliary devices

and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.

Coil data has a ±5% range depending

on the application, therefore specific

data may vary.

NEMA

Sizes

Motor

Voltage

Maximum

hp Rating

P.U. Volts P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts Maximum Operation

Rate Operations/Hour

P. U .

Time ms

D.O.

Time ms

Cold Hot VAR VA Watts VAR VA Watts Cold Hot

00 200

230

460

575

1-1/2

1-1/2

2

2

74% 78% 64 80 49 7.1 7.5 2.4 45% 46% 12,000 12 12

0200

230

460

575

3

3

5

5

74% 78% 78 100 65 9.2 10 3.1 45% 46% 12,000 12 12

1200

230

460

575

7-1/2

7-1/2

10

10

74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14

2200

230

460

575

10

15

25

25

74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14

3200

230

460

575

25

30

50

50

72% 76% 374 390 112 48 49.8 13 50% 52% 7200 14 11

4200

230

460

575

40

50

100

100

73% 76% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 54% 56% 2400 28 14

5200

230

460

575

75

100

200

200

75% 77% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 63% 64% 2400 25 13

Description

P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken

from closing of the coil circuit to main

contact touch.

D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken

from opening of the coil circuit to main

contact separation.

Cold Coil data with a cold coil.

Hot Coil data with a hot coil.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-3

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA Contactors and Starters

023

Table 30.3-3. DC Coil Data

General Coil Data

■Coil Offering—tape wound:

❑NEMA Sizes 00–0

❑UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)

■Coil Offering—encapsulated:

❑NEMA Sizes 1–3

❑UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)

■Coil Offering—encapsulated:

❑NEMA Sizes 4–5

❑UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)

■Operational Limits:

❑85% to 110% of rated voltage—AC

❑80% to 110% of rated voltage—DC

Table 30.3-4. Coil Data Notes

All data is based on a standard

contactor with no auxiliary devices

and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.

Coil data has a ±5% range depending

on the application, therefore specific

data may vary.

NEMA

Sizes

Motor

Voltage

P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts

(Hot)

P. U .

Time ms

D.O.

Time ms

Maximum Operation

Rate Operations/Hour

Mechanical

Life Millions

Amperes Watts Volts (Hot) Amperes Watts

00 and 0 12

24

48

120

6.4

3.2

1.6

0.64

76.8

76.8

76.8

76.8

80%

80%

80%

80%

0.28

0.14

0.07

0.028

3.36

3.36

3.36

3.36

60%

60%

60%

60%

22

22

22

22

17

17

17

17

3600

3600

3600

3600

5

5

5

5

1 and 2 12

24

48

120

15.4

6.2

2.9

1.1

126

88.4

76.2

67.3

68%

60%

56%

53%

0.42

0.21

0.11

0.041

4.98

4.96

5.04

4.87

30%

29%

28%

29%

21

20

20

20

12

13

14

16

3600

3600

3600

3600

2

2

2

2

312

24

48

120

24

12

6.1

2.5

293

288

295

298

65%

61%

62%

61%

0.40

0.20

0.097

0.038

4.84

4.75

4.67

4.57

23%

22%

22%

22%

39

38

37

37

14

14

14

16

3600

3600

3600

3600

2

2

2

2

4 and 5 24

48

120

240

18

9.0

3.3

1.7

400

400

450

440

67%

67%

65%

64%

0.22

0.11

0.05

0.02

5.3

5.2

5.4

4.9

25%

25%

28%

26%

53

49

56

49

14

16

19

21

2400

2400

2400

2400

2

2

2

2

Description

P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken

from closing of the coil circuit to main

contact touch.

D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken

from opening of the coil circuit to main

contact separation.

Cold Coil data with a cold coil.

Hot Coil data with a hot coil.

30.3-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA

024

Table 30.3-5. Specifications—Sizes 00–3

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size

CN15A

NEMA Size 00

CN15B

NEMA Size 0

CN15D

NEMA Size 1

CN15G

NEMA Size 2

CN15K

NEMA Size 3

Configuration

Number of poles

Auxiliary contacts, standard

Add-on auxiliary contacts

2, 3, 4

4th pole NO (1)

Top (4) or side (4)

2, 3

Side NO (1)

Top (4) or side (3)

2, 3, 4, 5

Side NO (1)

Top (4) or side (3)

2, 3, 4, 5

Side NO (1)

Top (4) or side (3)

2, 3

Side NO (1)

Left side (4) or right side (3)

Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 65 mm 90 mm

Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac

Continuous ampere ratings (I) 9 A 18 A 27 A 45 A 90 A

Maximum horsepower (hp)

Single-phase 115 V

230 V

1/3

1

1

2

2

3

3

7-1/2

7-1/2

15

Three-phase 200 V

230 V

460 V

575 V

1-1/2

1-1/2

2

2

3

3

5

5

7-1/2

7-1/2

10

10

10

15

25

25

25

30

50

50

Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10%

Operating temperature

Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)

Mechanical life

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

20,000,000

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

20,000,000

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

10,000,000

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

10,000,000

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

6,000,000

Electrical life (480 V/60 Hz)

AC-3

AC-4

4,000,000

90,000

3,000,000

85,000

5,000,000

200,000

3,500,000

62,000

1,700,000

80,000

Wire range

Power terminals 12–16 stranded,

12–14 solid Cu

8–16 stranded,

10–14 solid Cu

8–14 stranded

or solid Cu

2–14 (upper) and/or

6–14 (lower)

stranded or solid Cu

1/0–14 Cu

Control terminals 12–16 stranded,

12–14 solid Cu

12–16 stranded,

12–14 solid Cu

12–16 stranded,

12–14 solid Cu

12–16 stranded,

12–14 solid Cu

12–16 stranded

12–14 solid Cu

Power terminal torque

Line and load—lb-in

7 15 20 40 (14–8 AWG)

45 (6–4 AWG)

50 (3 AWG)

35 (14–10 AWG)

40 (8 AWG)

45 (6–4 AWG)

50 (3–1/0 AWG)

Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-5

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA

025

Table 30.3-6. Specifications—Sizes 4–5

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size

CN15N

NEMA Size 4

CN15S

NEMA Size 5

Configuration

Number of poles

Auxiliary contacts, standard

Add-on auxiliary contacts

2, 3

Side NO (1)

Left side (3) or right side (4)

2, 3

Side NO (1)

Left side (3) or right side (4)

Frame size 180 mm 180 mm

Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac

Continuous ampere ratings (i) 135 A 270 A

Maximum horsepower (hp)

Single-phase 115 V

230 V

—

—

—

—

Three-phase 200 V

230 V

460 V

575 V

40

50

100

100

75

100

200

200

Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10%

Operating temperature

Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)

Mechanical life

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

5,000,000

–20 °C to +65 °C

6000 (1828)

5,000,000

Electrical life (480 V/60 Hz)

AC-3

AC-4

800,000

70,000

500,000

34,000

Wire range

Power terminals Open—3/0–8 Cu;

Enclosed—250 kcmil–6 Cu/Al

750 kcmil—2 or

(2) 250 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al

Control terminals 12–16 stranded, 12–14 solid Cu 12–16 stranded, 12–14 solid Cu

Power terminal torque

Line and load—lb-in

200 550

Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300

30.3-6

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data—NEMA

026

Table 30.3-7. 380V , 50 Hz Starters—Maximum hp Ratings

Table 30.3-8. Motor FLA Current Ranges

1Size 1 Lower Current Range for motor hp range 1/4 hp to 2 hp at 460 V.

Table 30.3-9. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2—Open and Enclosed

2Two compartment box lug.

Table 30.3-10. Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit 3

3DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only.

Table 30.3-11. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500 A

Description NEMA Size

123 4 5 6

Maximum hp 10 25 50 75 150 300

Description NEMA Size

1 1123456

1.15 to

1.25 S.F.

0.47–3.81 3.15–27.00 3.15–45.00 9.90–90.00 9.90–135.00 38.30–270.00 38.30–540.00

1.0 S.F.

0.51–4.14 3.43–27.00 3.43–45.00 10.80–90.00 10.80–135.00 41.70–270.00 41.70–540.00

NEMA

Size

Cu

Only

Power Terminals—Line

00

0

1

2

#12–#16 stranded, #12–#14 solid

#8–#16 stranded, #10–#14 solid

#8–#14 stranded or solid

#3–#14 (upper) and/or #6–#14 (lower) stranded or solid 2

AC Volts 120 V 240 V 480 V 600 V

NC Contact B600

Make and break amperes

Break amperes

Continuous amperes

30

3

5

15

1.5

5

7. 5

0.75

5

6

0.6

5

NO Contact C600

Make and break amperes

Break amperes

Continuous amperes

15

1.5

2.5

7. 5

0.75

2.5

3.375

0.375

2.5

3

0.3

2.5

Description Specification

45 mm 55 mm

Capacity

Load terminals

Terminal capacity

Tightening torque

12–10 AWG (4–6 mm2)

8–6 AWG (6–16 mm2)

20–25 lb-in (2.3–2.8 Nm)

25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm)

6–1 AWG (16–50 mm2)

25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm)

Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals

Terminal capacity

Tightening torque

2 x (18–12) AWG

5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm)

2 x (18–12) AWG

5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm)

Voltages

Insulation voltage Ui (three-phase)

Insulation voltage Ui (control)

690 Vac

500 Vac

690 Vac

500 Vac

Rated impulse withstand voltage

Overvoltage category/pollution degree

6000 Vac

III/3

6000 Vac

III/3

Table 30.3-12. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—

AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2

Open and Enclosed

4Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size:

Sizes 00–0 to 8 AWG and Sizes 1–2 to

2 AWG.

Table 30.3-13. Wire (75 °C) Sizes—

AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 3–8—

Open and Enclosed

Table 30.3-14. C306 Control Terminals—

Cu Only

Te rm i n a l W i r e

Size 4

Catalog

Number

Power Terminals—Load—Cu Only

(Stranded or Solid)

32 A

75 A

45 A

14–6 AWG

14–2 AWG

14–6 AWG

C306DN3B

C306GN3B

C396A_

NEMA

Size

Wire

Size

C306 Power Terminals—Line and Load

310–14 AWG Al Cu

4 Open–#8–#3/0 Cu

Enclosed–#6 250 kcmil–Al Cu

5 750 kcmil–#2 or

(2) #3/0 250 kcmil–Al Cu

Description

(2) #12–#16 stranded

(2) #12–#14 solid

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-7

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data

027

Electrical Life—AC-3 and AC-4

Utilization Categories

Life Load Curves

Eaton’s Freedom Series NEMA

contactors have been designed

and manufactured for superior life

performance in any worldwide

application. All testing has been based

on requirements as found in NEMA

and UL standards and conducted by

Eaton. Actual application life may

vary depending on environmental

conditions and application duty cycle.

Utilization Categories

AC-1—Non-inductive or slightly

inductive loads, such as resistance

furnaces and heating.

AC-2—Starting of slip-ring motors.

AC-3—Squirrel cage motors; starting,

switching off motors during running.

AC-4—Squirrel cage motors; starting,

plugging, inching or jogging.

Note: AC-3 tests are conducted at rated

device currents and AC-4 tests are conducted

at six times rated device currents. All tests

have been run at 460 V, 60 Hz.

Contactor Choice

■Decide what utilization category

your application is and choose the

appropriate curve

■Locate the intersection of the

life-load curve of the appropriate

contactor with the applications

operational current (Ie), as found

on the horizontal axis

■Read the estimated contact life

along the vertical axis in number

of operational cycles

Figure 30.3-10. AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories

AN19 Competitive Retrofit Kits

The retrofit kits provide a packaged

solution to replace competitive starters

with the Freedom AN19 starter using

existing hole patterns. Suitable for

replacement of Allen-Bradley,

Square D, GE and Siemens starters.

Kit contents

■Competitive mounting plate

■AN19 starter

■Remote reset module

■NO 10250T pushbutton

■RESET pushbutton legend plate

■16 gauge control wire

Table 30.3-15. AN19 Competitive Retrofit Kit—

Product Selection

NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00 – 5, 480 V 60 Hz

100,000,000

10,000,000

1,000,000

100,000 9

110

Break Amperes 100 1000

18 27 45 90 135 270

Size 00

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Size 5

Operations Operations

NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00 – 5, 480 V 60 Hz

100,000,000

Size 00

Size 0

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Size 5

10,000,000

1,000,000

100,000

10,000 10854

110

Break Amperes

100 1000 10,000

153 270 540 822 1620

Size Description Catalog Number

1 120 Vac coil,

4–20 A

overload

AN19DN0A5E020-CRK

2 120 Vac coil,

9–45 A

overload

AN19GN0A5E045-CRK

3 120 Vac coil,

20–100 A

overload

AN19KN0A5E100-CRK

4 120 Vac coil,

28–140 A

overload

AN19NN0A5E140-CRK

5 120 Vac coil,

60–300 A

overload

AN19SN0A5E300-CRK

30.3-8

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Product Selection

028

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.3-16. NEMA Freedom Line Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System

1Use for Sizes 0–3, HMCP 600 V applications only.

Table 30.3-17. Magnetic Coil Codes (System Voltage) 2

2When control power transformer modification codes (C1–C11)

are used or when starter class includes CPT (i.e., ECN07, 18) see

Table 30.3-18 for system voltage code.

Table 30.3-18. Control Power Transformer Codes (System Voltage)

E C N 22 2 1 A A F -

Design

N= Freedom NEMA

2= A200

Modification Codes

(See PG03300001E)

Coil Voltage and/or Control Transformers

See Table 30.3-17 and Table 30.3-18

Class

01

= Non-reversing contactor—three-pole

Non-reversing contactor—two-pole

Non-reversing contactor—four-pole

Non-reversing contactor—five-pole

02

= Reversing contactor—three-pole

05

= Non-combination non-reversing starter

06

= Non-combination reversing starter

07

= Non-combination non-reversing starter with CPT

08

= Non-combination single-phase non-reversing starter

16

= Combination non-reversing starter—fusible disconnect

Combination non-reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect

Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter

fusible/non-fusible disconnect

17

= Combination reversing starter—fusible disconnect

Combination reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect

18

= Combination reversing starter—fusible disconnect with CPT

Combination reversing starter—non-fusible disconnect

with CPT

22

= Combination non-reversing starter—circuit breaker

Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter—

circuit breaker

23

= Combination reversing starter—circuit breaker

24

= Combination non-reversing starter—circuit breaker with CPT

Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings

A= None

B= 30 A/250 V R

C= 30 A/600 V R

D= 60 A/250 V R

E= 60 A/600 V R

F= 100 A/250 V R

G= 100 A/600 V R

H= 200 A/250 V R

J= 200 A/600 V R

K= 400 A/250 V R

L= 400 A/600 V R

M= 600 A/250 V R

N= 600 A/600 V R

P= 800 A/600 V L

Q= 1200 A/600 V L

R= 1600 A/600 V L

S= 2000 A/600 V L

T= By description

HMCP/E or Breaker Ratings

A= None

B= 3 A

C= 7 A

D= 15 A

E= 30 A

F= 50 A

W= 70 A

G= 100 A

H= 150 A

J= 250 A

K= 400 A

L= 600 A

M= 800 A

N= 1000 A

P= 1200 A

Q= 2000 A

R= 3000 A

T= By description

5= 3 A 1

6= 7 A 1

7= 15 A 1

8= 30 A 1

9= 50 A 1

I= 100 A 1

Cover Control

Type 1 non-combination

All others

E22 style combination

(Contact Eaton)

Contactors

3 = Three-pole

Enclosure Type

1 = Type 1—General purpose

2 = Type 3R—Rainproof

3 = Type 4—Watertight (painted steel)

4 = Type 4X—Watertight (304-Grade stainless steel)

5 = Type 4X—Corrosion (nonmetallic)

6 = Type 7/9—Bolted hazardous location

7 = Type 7/9—Threaded hazardous location

8 = Type 12—Dust-tight

9 = Type 4X—316-Grade stainless steel

NEMA Size

A= Size 00

0= Size 0

1= Size 1

2= Size 2

3 = Size 3

4 = Size 4

5 = Size 5

6 = Size 6

7 = Size 7

8 = Size 8

9 = Size 9

Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

J

120/60 110/50

240/60 220/50

460/60 440/50

575/60 550/50

208/60

550/50

277/60

208–240/60

K

L

M

P

Q

R

S

T

240/50

380/50

415/50

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

125 Vdc

24/60

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

24/50

32/50

48/60

104–120/60

48/50

By description

Code Primary Secondary

B

C

D

E

H

240/480–220/440 wired for 240 V

240/480–220/440 wired for 480 V

600/60–550/50

208/60

277/60

120/60–110/50

120/60–110/50

120/60–110/50

120/60

120/60

L

M

Q

R

S

380/50

415/50

208/60

240/480–220/440 wired for 240 V

240/480–220/440 wired for 480 V

110/50

110/50

24

24

24

T

U

V

W

X

600/60

277/60

380/50

415/50

240/480/600 wired for 480 V

24

24

24

24

120

Y

Z

240/480/600 wired for 480 V

By description

24

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-9

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data

029

Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.3-19. Type 1 Freedom Contactors

1Consult factory.

Table 30.3-20. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Contactors

2Consult factory.

Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.

Table 30.3-21. Type 1 Freedom

Non-combination Starters

3Consult factory.

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

NEMA Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing Contactors—

without Control Power Transformers

00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4)

00 (2P, 3P, 4P)

with top adders

2 7.3 (3.3)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P)

with top adders

2 7.3 (3.3)

0 (5P) 2 7.3 (3.3)

1 (2P, 3P) 1 7.9 (3.6)

1 (2P, 3P)

with top adders

311 (5.0)

1 (4P, 5P) 2 8.3 (3.8)

2 (2P, 3P, 4P 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9)

3 (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16)

4 (2P, 3P) 4 47 (21)

5 10 113 (51)

6 F1E 325 (148)

7 F1E 1

8 F1E 1

9 F1E 1

Non-reversing Contactors—

with Control Power Transformers

00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4)

00 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)

with top adders

315 (6.8)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12 (5.4)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)

with top adders

315 (6.8)

1 (2P, 3P) 2 12.2 (5.5)

1 (2P, 3P)

with top adders

3 12.5 (5.7)

1 (4P, 5P) 2 12.6 (5.7)

2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.8 (5.8)

3 (2P, 3P) 4 40 (18)

4 (2P, 3P) 4 52 (24)

5 10 120 (54)

6 F1E 335 (152)

7 F1E 1

8 F1E 1

9 F1E 1

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors—

without Control Power Transformers

00 2 7.8 (3.5)

028 (3.6)

1311 (5.0)

2312 (5.4)

3 4 67 (30)

4 4 154 (70)

5 10 170 (77)

6 F1E 425 (193)

7 F1E 1

8 F1E 1

9 F2E 1

NEMA Size

(Poles)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing Contactors—

without Control Power Transformers

00 5 14 (6.4)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 14 (6.4)

1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15 (6.8)

2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15.5 (7.0)

3 (2P, 3P) 8 45 (20)

4 (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25)

5 10 140 (64)

6 F1E 385 (175)

7 F1E 2

8 F1E 2

9 F1E 2

Non-reversing Contactors—

with Control Power Transformers

00 5 18 (8.2)

0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 18 (8.2)

1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19 (8.6)

2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19.5 (8.9)

3 (2P, 3P) 8 52 (24)

4 (2P, 3P) 8 63 (29)

5 10 147 (67)

6 F1E 405 (184)

7 F1E 2

8 F1E 2

9 F1E 2

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors—

with or without Control Power Transformers

00 6 18 (8.2)

0618 (8.2)

1619 (8.6)

2619 (8.6)

3 8 47 (21)

4 9 69 (31)

5 10 170 (77)

6 F1E 495 (225)

7 F1E 2

8 F1E 2

9 F2E 2

NEMA Size Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing Starters—

without Control Power Transformers

00 1 7 (3.2)

00 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5)

017.1 (3.2)

0 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5)

117.9 (3.6)

1–2 with top adders/SSOL 3 11.5 (5.2)

2 2 8.5 (3.9)

3 4 35 (16)

4 4 47 (21)

5 10 139 (63)

6 F1E 360 (163)

7 F1E 3

8 F1E 3

9 F1E 3

Non-reversing Starters—

with Control Power Transformers

00 3 15 (6.8)

0315 (6.8)

1316 (7.3)

2316.2 (7.4)

3 4 42 (19)

4 4 54 (25)

5 10 146 (66)

6 F1E 385 (175)

7 F1E 3

8 F1E 3

9 F1E 3

Reversing Starters—

without Control Power Transformers

00 2 8 (3.6)

028 (3.6)

0 with top adders 3 11 (5)

1313 (5.9)

1 with top adders 3 13.4 (6.1)

2315 (6.8)

3 4 43 (20)

4 9 65 (30)

5 10 165 (75)

6 F1E 450 (204)

7 F1E 3

8 F2E 3

9 F2E 3

Reversing Starters—

with Control Power Transformers

00 with top adders 3 15 (6.8)

0315 (6.8)

1 with top adders 3 17 (7.7)

2319 (8.6)

3 4 50 (23)

4 9 72 (33)

5 10 172 (78)

6 F1E 495 (225)

7 F1E 3

8 F2E 3

9 F2E 3

30.3-10

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Freedom Line—Technical Data

030

Table 30.3-22. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Non-combination Starters

1Consult factory.

Table 30.3-23. Type 1 Freedom

Combination Starters

2Consult factory.

Table 30.3-24. Type 1 Freedom Non-reversing

Combination Starters—Narrow Enclosure

Table 30.3-25. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Combination Starters

3Consult factory.

NEMA Size /

IEC Frame

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing Starters—

without Control Power Transformers

0514.3 (6.5)

1 5 15.3 (6.9)

2716 (7.3)

3 8 46 (21)

4 8 60 (27)

5 10 150 (68)

6 F1E 415 (188)

7 F1E 1

8 F1E 1

9 F1E 1

Non-reversing Starters—

with Control Power Transformers

0618 (8.2)

1619 (8.6)

2 6 20 (9)

3 8 53 (24)

4 8 67 (30)

5 10 157 (71)

6 F1E 1

7 F1E 1

8 F1E 1

9 F1E 1

Reversing Starters—

with or without Control Power Transformers

0 7 18.5 (8.4)

1 7 19.5 (8.9)

2 7 21 (10)

3 8 48 (22)

4 9 72 (33)

5 10 175 (79)

6 F1E 525 (238)

7 F1E 1

8 F2E 1

9 F2E 1

NEMA Size

(Device)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing —

with and without Control Power Transformers

0 A 37 (17)

1 A 38 (17)

2 A 39 (18)

3 C 72 (33)

4 (HMCP) C 90 (41)

4 (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68)

5 E 180 (82)

6 F1E 435 (197)

7 F2E 2

8 F2E 2

9 F2E 2

Reversing —

with and without Control Power Transformers

0 B 42 (19)

1 B 43 (20)

2 B 44 (20)

3 C 84 (38)

4 D 173 (79)

5 F1E 2

6 F1E 550 (250)

7 F2E 2

8 F2E 2

922

Non-reversing—Oversized

0–1–2 B 44 (20)

NEMA Size Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

NEMA 1 Enclosed

0–1–2 I 35 (16)

NEMA 12 Enclosed

0–1–2 I 36 (16)

NEMA 12 Enclosed with Safety Door Interlock

0–1–2 I 37 (17)

NEMA Size

(Device)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Non-reversing—

with and without Control Power Transformers

0 A 37 (17)

1 A 38 (17)

2 A 39 (18)

3 C 72 (33)

4 (HMCP) C 90 (41)

4 (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68)

5 E 180 (82)

6 F1E 435 (197)

7 F2E 3

8 F2E 3

9 F2E 3

Reversing—

with and without Control Power Transformers

0 B 42 (19)

1 B 43 (20)

2 B 44 (20)

3 C 84 (38)

4 D 173 (79)

5 E 550 (250)

6 F1E 3

7 F2E 3

8 F2E 3

933

Non-reversing—Oversized

0–1–2 B 44 (20)

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-11

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440 Series

031

C440 Series

Overview

Eaton’s C400 series of advanced motor protection offers innovative solutions with varying levels of capability.

From basic monitoring and protection to advanced motor management and efficiency calculations, the C400 series

has the exact solution to meet the needs of your application.

Table 30.3-26. C440 Series Comparison

Product

C440 C441 C445

Range 0.3–1500 A

Up to 690 Vac (50/60 Hz)

1–540 A

Up to 600 Vac (50/60 Hz)

0.3–800 A

Up to 690 Vac (20–80 Hz)

Up to 4160 Vac w/PTs

Features Selectable trip class (10 A, 10, 20, 30), ground

fault and phase imbalance protections

Flexible communication options for both

monitoring and control

Highly configurable line (voltage), load

(power) and motor (current) monitoring

and protection

Optional remote user interface allows

user to configure and monitor without

opening a panel door

All-in-one design reduces inventory costs

by covering 1–540 A applications with only

two SKU numbers

Full line, load and motor system coverage,

including advanced monitoring and

protection algorithms

USB connectivity (both inside and outside

the control panel door) provide monitoring

and configuration with a PC

Multiple predefined operating modes with

corresponding control station options

Global modular design allows for

customization of system to match exact

customer needs

Benefits Extends the life of plant assets with

selectable motor protection features

Status LED provides added assurance

that valuable assets are protected by

indicating the overload operational status

Advanced diagnostics allow for quick and

accurate identification of the root source

of motor, pump or power quality faults

Configurable low-power trip capability

provides superior protection for smaller

motors, slow speed motors and lightly

loaded large motors

Voltage Loss Restart ability removes

the need for users to manually restart

motors after momentary voltage dips by

automatically staggering restarts

Multiple embedded fieldbus options

allow integration into widest range of PLC

and DCS control systems without additional

modules or supply power

Motor efficiency, motor torque and

peak energy monitoring enhance users’

understanding of their application

30.3-12

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C441 Motor Insight

032

Table 30.3-27. Features

Note: Not all options are standard. Please consult factory.

Table 30.3-28. Supporting Documentation

Features C440 C441 C445

Protection

Thermal overload ■■■

Phase loss ■■■

Selectable trip class ■■■

Ground fault ■■■

Current unbalance — ■■

Voltage unbalance — ■■

Phase reversal — ■■

Jam — ■■

Under/overpower trip — ■■

Under/overvoltage trip — ■■

Under/overcurrent trip — ■■

Under/overfrequency — — ■

Stall — — ■

Instantaneous overcurrent — — ■

PTC (motor temperature) — — ■

Energy deviations — — ■

Voltage loss restart — — ■

Control

Hard wire/local reset ■■■

Network/electronic reset ■■■

Programmable alarms — ■■

Programmable trips — ■■

Multiple operation modes — — ■

Control user interface — — ■

Motor Control Center Availability

IEC—Power Xpert CX®■—■

IEC—Power Xpert CXH™ ■—■

NEMAT—Freedom ■■■

NEMA—FlashGard®■■■

NEMA—Freedom ARC ■■■

NEMA—Aftermarket buckets ■■■

Features C440 C441 C445

Monitoring

Thermal capacity ■■■

Phase currents ■■■

Current unbalance ■■■

Ground fault current ■■■

Frequency — ■■

Voltage unbalance — ■■

Phase voltages — ■■

Real power (kW) — ■■

Under/overpower trip — ■■

Under/overvoltage trip — ■■

Under/overcurrent trip — ■■

Motor start time/count — — ■

Motor efficiency — — ■

Motor torque — — ■

Energy (kWh) — — ■

Apparent power (kVA) — — ■

Trip snapshot — — ■

Communications

Modbus® RTU ■■■

PROFIBUS®■■■

Modbus TCP ■■■

EtherNet/IP ■■■

DeviceNet™ ■■Future

USB — — ■

Description Publication number

Motor Control and Protection Catalog CA08100006E

C441 User Manual MN04209001E

C445 User Manual MN042001EN

EIP-Assist Tag Generation Tool User Manual MN181001EN

FlashGard NEMA MCC Brochure BR04302001E

Power Xpert CX IEC MCC Brochure BR043003EN

Power Xpert CXH IEC MCC Brochure BR043008EN

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-13

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C441 Motor Insight

033

C441 Motor Insight

C441 Motor Insight Overload

and Monitoring Relay

General Description

Eaton’s C441 Motor Insight®, the

first product in the intelligent power

control solutions family, is a highly

configurable motor, load and line

protection device with power monitor-

ing, diagnostics and flexible communi-

cations, allowing the customer to save

energy, optimize their maintenance

schedules and configure greater

system protection, thus reducing

overall costs and downtime.

C441 Motor Insight is available in

either a line-powered or 120 Vac

control powered design, capable of

monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac.

Each of these units is available in

a 1–9 A or a 5–90 A FLA model. With

external CTs, C441 Motor Insight

can protect motors up to 540 A FLA.

Available add-on accessories

include communication modules

for Modbus®, DeviceNet™ and

PROFIBUS®, all with I/O options.

For ease-of-use and operator

safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a

remote display that mounts easily

with two 30 mm knockouts.

Features

Size/Range

■Broad FLA range of 1–540 A

■Selectable trip class (5–30)

■Four operating voltage options

❑Line-powered from 240 Vac,

480 Vac, 600 Vac

❑Control-powered from 120 Vac

Motor Control

■Two output relays

❑One B300 Form C fault relay and

one B300 ground fault shunt relay

❑

Other relay configurations

are

available, including one Form A

and one Form B SPST (fault

and auxiliary relays) allowing

programmable isolated relay

behavior and unique voltages

■One external remote reset terminal

■Trip status indicator

Motor Protection

■Thermal overload

■Jam/stall protection

■Current level alarming

■Current imbalance

■Current phase loss

■Ground fault

■Phase reversal

Load Protection

■Undercurrent

■Low power (kW)

■High power (kW)

Line Protection

■Overvoltage

■Undervoltage

■Voltage imbalance

■Voltage phase loss

Monitoring Capabilities

■Current—average and phase rms

■Voltage—average and phase rms

■Power—motor kW

■

Power factor

■Frequency

■Thermal capacity

■Run hours

■Ground fault current

■Current imbalance %

■Voltage imbalance %

■Motor starts

■Motor run hours

Options

■Type 1, 12 remote display

■Type 3R remote display kit

■Communication modules

❑Modbus

❑Modbus with I/O

❑DeviceNet with I/O

❑PROFIBUS with I/O

❑Modbus TCP with I/O

(contact product line)

❑EtherNet/IP with I/O

(contact product line)

Benefits

Reliability and Improved Uptime

■Advanced diagnostics allows for

quick and accurate identification

of the root source of a motor, pump

or power quality fault; reducing

troubleshooting time and the loss of

productivity, reducing repeat faults

due to misdiagnosis, and increasing

process output and profitability

■Provides superior protection

of motors and pumps before

catastrophic failure occurs

■Increases profitability with greater

process uptime and throughput,

reduced costs per repair, reduced

energy consumption and extended

equipment life

■Adjustments to overload configura-

tion can be made at any time

Safety

■IP 20 rated terminal blocks

■Terminal blocks are set back

from the display to reduce

operator shock hazard

■Remote display (optional) does

not require that the operator open

the panel to configure the device

Flexibility

■Communications modules

❑Offered in a variety of

configurations

❑External snap-on modules

provide support for multiple

communications protocols

■Advanced power, voltage and

current monitoring capabilities

■Communications modules

and remote display can be

used simultaneously

■Highly configurable fault and

reset characteristics for numerous

applications

■Fully programmable isolated

fault and auxiliary relays

Ease of Use

■Bright LED display with easy-to-

understand setting and references

■Powered from line voltage or

120 Vac control power

■Remote display powered from

base unit

■Full word descriptions and units

on user interface

Standards and Certifications

■cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508

■UL 1053 applicable sections for

ground fault detection

■CSA certified (Class 3211-02)

■CE

■NEMA

■IEC EN 60947-4-1

■RoHS

30.3-14

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C441 Motor Insight

034

Product Selection

Table 30.3-29. C441 Motor Insight

Table 30.3-30. C441 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule

1Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required.

Operating Voltage Codes:

2Any manufacturer’s CTs may be used.

Accessories

Table 30.3-31. Communication Modules

Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside

C441 Motor Insight offers several accessories for the

customer’s ease of use and safety:

■Types 1 and 12 remote display

■Type 3R remote display kit

■Mounting plate adapter

Features and Benefits

■Remote display unit:

❑Same user interface as the overload relay

❑Enhanced operator safety—operator can configure

the overload without opening the enclosure door

■Type 3R kit mounts with standard 30 mm holes

■Mounting plate for retrofit in existing installations

Table 30.3-32. Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside

Communication Cables

The remote display requires a communication cable

to connect to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay:

Table 30.3-33. Communication Cable Lengths

Table 30.3-34. Current Transformer Kits

For more information about technical data and

specifications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5—

Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.

Power

Source

Monitoring

Range

Current

Range

Catalog

Number

240 Vac (170–264) 170–264 Vac 1–9 A

5–90 A

C441BA

C441BB

480 Vac (323–528) 323–528 Vac 1–9 A

5–90 A

C441CA

C441CB

600 Vac (489–660) 489–660 Vac 1–9 A

5–90 A

C441DA

C441DB

120 Vac (93.5–132) 170–660 Vac 1–9 A

5–90 A

C4410109NOUI

C4410590NOUI

Catalog

Number

1

Motor

FLA

No. of

Loops

No. of

Conductors

Through

CT Primary

CT

Multiplier

Setting

External

CT Kit

Catalog

Number

2

Current Range: 5–90 A

C441_B and

C4410590NOUI

5–22.5 A

6.67–30 A

3

2

4

3

4

3

—

—

10–45 A

20–90 A

1

0

2

1

2

1

—

—

Current Range: 1–9 A

C441_A and

C4410109NOUI

1–5 A

2–9 A

1

0

2

1

2

1

—

—

60–135 A

120–270 A

240–540 A

0

0

0

1

1

1

150–(150:5)

300–

(300:5)

600–

(600:5)

C441CTKIT150

C441CTKIT300

C441CTKIT600

Code Voltage

B240 Vac

C480 Vac

D600 Vac

<empty> 120 Vac control power

Description I/O Catalog

Number

Modbus

Modbus communication module None C441M

Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N

24 Vdc C441P

DeviceNet

DeviceNet communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441K

24 Vdc C441L

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S

24 Vdc C441Q

EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP

Ethernet-based communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441R

24 Vdc C441T

Description Catalog

Number

Remote display Types 1 and 12 (UL 508)

Type 3R kit for remote display (UL 508)

Conversion plate

C4411

C4413

C441CMP1

Length in Inches (meters) Catalog

Number

9.8 (0.25)

39.4 (1.0)

D77E-QPIP25

D77E-QPIP100

78.7 (2.0)

118.1 (3.0)

D77E-QPIP200

D77E-QPIP300

Description Catalog

Number

Three 150:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight

Three 300:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight

Three 600:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight

C441CTKIT150

C441CTKIT300

C441CTKIT600

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-15

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

035

C440/XT Electronic

Overload Relay

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

General Description

Eaton’s electronic overload relay (EOL)

is the most compact, high-featured,

economical product in its class.

Designed on a global platform, the

new EOL covers the entire power

control spectrum, including NEMA,

IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA

and DP versions are offered with

the C440 designation while the IEC

offering has the XT designation. The

electronic design provides reliable,

accurate and value-driven protection

and communications capabilities in a

single compact device. It is the flexible

choice for any application requiring

easy-to-use, reliable protection.

Eaton has a long history of innovations

and product development in motor

control and protection, including both

traditional NEMA, as well as IEC con-

trol. It was from this experience that

the C440 was developed, delivering

new solutions to meet today’s

demands.

C440 is a self-powered electronic

overload relay available up to 100 A

as a self-contained unit. With external

CTs, C440 can protect motor up

to 1500 FLA. Available add-on

accessories include remote reset

capability and communication

modules with I/O for DeviceNet,

PROFIBUS and Modbus.

Features

■Reliable, accurate, electronic

motor protection

■Easy to select, install and maintain

■Compact size

■Flexible, intelligent design

■Global product offering—

available with NEMA, IEC and

DP power control

Size/Range

■Broad FLA range (0.33–1500 A)

■Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)

■Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and

DP contactors

■Most compact electronic overload in

its class

Motor Control

■Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault

(NC) contacts

■Test/Trip button

Motor Protection

■Thermal overload

■Phase loss

■Selectable (ON/OFF)

phase imbalance

■Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault

User Interface

■Large FLA selection dial

■Trip status indicator

■Operating mode LED

■DIP switch selectable trip class,

phase imbalance and ground fault

■Selectable Auto/Manual reset

Feature Options

■Remote reset

❑120 Vac

❑24 Vac

❑24 Vdc

■Tamper-proof cover

■Communications modules

❑Modbus RTU RS-485

❑DeviceNet with I/O

❑PROFIBUS with I/O

❑Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)

❑EtherNet/IP (planned)

❑Smartwire (planned)

Benefits

Reliability and Improved Uptime

■C440 provides the users with peace

of mind knowing that their assets

are protected with the highest level

of motor protection and communi-

cation capability in its class

■Extends the life of plant assets

with selectable motor protection

features such as trip class, phase

imbalance and ground fault

■Protects against unnecessary

downtime by discovering changes

in your system (line/load) with

remote monitoring capabilities

■Status LED provides added

assurance that valuable assets

are protected by indicating the

overload operational status

Flexibility

■Available with NEMA, IEC and

DP contactors

■Improves return on investment by

reducing inventory carrying costs

with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and

selectable trip class

■Design incorporates built-in ground

fault protection, thus eliminating the

need for separate CTs and modules

■Flexible communication with

optional I/O enables easy integration

into plant management systems for

remote monitoring and control

■Available as an open component

and in enclosed control and motor

control center assemblies

Monitoring Capabilities

■Individual phase currents rms

■Average three-phase current rms

■Thermal memory

■Fault indication (overload, phase

loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)

Safety

■IP 20 rated terminal blocks

■Available in Eaton’s industry-leading

FlashGard MCCs

■Tested to the highest industry

standards, such as UL, CSA,

CE and IEC

■RoHS compliant

Standards and Certifications

■UL

■CSA

■CE

■NEMA

■IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660

■ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)

■RoHS

■ATEX directive 94/9/EC

■Equipment Group 2, Category 2

30.3-16

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

036

Product Selection

Table 30.3-35. XT Electronic Overload Relays

Table 30.3-36. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Use with Large Frame XT Contactors (L–R)

Use CTs and 1–5 A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).

For Use with

XT Contactor Frame

For Use with

Contactor

Overload

Range (Amps)

Contact

Sequence

Frame

Size

Auxiliary Contact

Configuration

Ty p e C a t a l o g

Number

For Direct Mount to XT Contactors

B XTCE007B…,

XTCE009B…,

XTCE012B…,

XTCE015B…

0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65 XTOE1P6BCS

1–5 ZEB12-5 XTOE005BCS

4–20 ZEB12-20 XTOE020BCS

CXTCE018C…,

XTCE025C…,

XTCE032C

0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1,65 XTOE1P6CCS

1–5 ZEB32-5 XTOE005CCS

4–20 ZEB32-20 XTOE020CCS

9–45 ZEB32-45 XTOE045CCS

D XTCE040D…,

XTCE050D…,

XTCE065D…,

XTCE072D…

9–45 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45 XTOE045DCS

20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100 XTOE100DCS

F, G XTCE080F…,

XTCE095F…,

XTCE115G…,

XTCE150G…,

XTCE170G…

20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS

With Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors

B XTCE007B…,

XTCE009B…,

XTCE012B…,

XTCE015B…

0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1.65-GF XTOE1P6BGS

1–5 ZEB12-5-GF XTOE005BGS

4–20 ZEB12-20-GF XTOE020BGS

CXTCE018C…,

XTCE025C…,

XTCE032C

0.33–1.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1.65-GF XTOE1P6CGS

1–5 ZEB32-5-GF XTOE005CGS

4–20 ZEB32-20-GF XTOE020CGS

9–45 ZEB32-45-GF XTOE045CGS

D XTCE040D…,

XTCE050D…,

XTCE065D…,

XTCE072D…

9–45 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45-GF XTOE045DGS

20–100 55 mm ZEB65-100-GF XTOE100DGS

F, G XTCE080F…,

XTCE095F…,

XTCE115G…,

XTCE150G…,

XTCE170G…

20–100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS

XT

Contactor

Frame

For Use with

IEC Contactor

Ampere Range

(AC-3)

CT Range

(Ampere)

Description CT Kit

Catalog

Number

Te r m i n a l

Size

Overload

Relay

Catalog

Number

L, M 185–500 60–300 300: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated lugs

ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil

(2) 250 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

XTOE005CCSS

M, N 300–820 120–600 600: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

XTOE005CCSS

N 580–1000 200–1000 1000: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT1000 (3) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

XTOE005CCSS

R 1600 300–1500 1500: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT1500 (4) 750 kcmil

1/0 Cu/Al

XTOE005CCSS

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

2469896

9795

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-17

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

037

Table 30.3-37. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Table 30.3-38. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to Freedom Series Contactors

1CN15 contactor listed is non-reversing with a 120 Vac coil. For more options, see Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E,

Tab 33, Section 33.1.

Table 30.3-39. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Use with NEMA Contactors Sizes 4–8

Use CTs and 1–5 A C440 overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).

Table 30.3-40. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Overload

Range (Amps)

Frame

Size

Contact

Sequence

Type Overload Relay

Catalog Number

Overload Relay with Ground

Fault Catalog Number

Overload Relay

0.33–1.65 45 mm ZEB32-1.65/KK XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE1P6CGSS

1–5 ZEB32-5/KK XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS

4–20 ZEB32-20/KK XTOE020CCSS XTOE020CGSS

9–45 ZEB32-45/KK XTOE045CCSS XTOE045CGSS

20–100 55 mm ZEB150-100/KK XTOE100GCSS XTOE100GGSS

For Use with Freedom

NEMA Contactor Size

For Use with

Contactor 1

Overload

Range (Amps)

Standard Feature Set

Catalog Number

Standard Feature Set with

Ground Fault Catalog Number

00 CN15AN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF00 C440A2A1P6SF00

1–5 C440A1A005SF00 C440A2A005SF00

4–20 C440A1A020SF00 C440A2A020SF00

0 CN15BN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF0 C440A2A1P6SF0

1–5 C440A1A005SF0 C440A2A005SF0

4–20 C440A1A020SF0 C440A2A020SF0

1 CN15DN3_B 0.33–1.65 C440A1A1P6SF1 C440A2A1P6SF1

1–5 C440A1A005SF1 C440A2A005SF1

4–20 C440A1A020SF1 C440A2A020SF1

9–45 C440A1A045SF1 C440A2A045SF1

2 CN15GN3_B 1–5 C440A1A005SF2 C440A2A005SF2

4–20 C440A1A020SF2 C440A2A020SF2

9–45 C440A1A045SF2 C440A2A045SF2

3 CN15KN3_ 20–100 C440B1A100SF3 C440B2A100SF3

For Use with NEMA

Contactor Size

CT Range

(Ampere)

Description CT Kit

Catalog Number

Te r m i n a l

Size

Overload Relay

Catalog Number

4 and 5 60–300 300: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil

(2) 250 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

C440A1A005SAX

6 120–600 600: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

C440A1A005SAX

7 200–1000 1000: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT1000 (3) 750 kcmil

3/0 Cu/Al

C440A1A005SAX

8 300–1500 1500: 5 panel-mount

CT kit with integrated,

pass-through holes

ZEB-XCT1500 (4) 750 kcmil

1/0 Cu/Al

C440A1A005SAX

Overload

Range

Frame

Size

Overload Relay

Catalog Number

Overload Relay with

Ground Fault Catalog Number

0.33–1.65 45 mm C440A1A1P6SAX C440A2A1P6SAX

1–5 C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX

4–20 C440A1A020SAX C440A2A020SAX

9–45 C440A1A045SAX C440A2A045SAX

20–100 55 mm C440B1A100SAX C440B2A100SAX

1359795

2469896

30.3-18

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

038

Table 30.3-41. Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing

1Underscore (_) indicates coils suffix required, see Coil Suffix table below.

2Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table below.

3Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 1–5 A C440

overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).

4NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60–300 A panel-mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 1–5 A C440 overload relay

(C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).

Table 30.3-42. Coil Suffix Codes Table 30.3-43. C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only)

5Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4

contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300)

and 1–5 A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or

C440A2A005SELAX).

NEMA

Size

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Service Limit

Current Rating

(Amps)

Maximum UL Horsepower Three-Pole

Non-Reversing 12

Catalog Number

Three-Pole

Reversing 12

Catalog Number

Single-Phase Three-Phase

115 V 230 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V

C440 Electronic Overload Relays

00

0

9

18

11

21

1/3

1

1

2

1-1/2

3

1-1/2

3

2

5

2

5

AN19AN0_ 5E _

AN19BN0_ 5E _

AN59AN0_ 5E _

AN59BN0_ 5E _

1

2

3

27

45

90

32

52

104

2

3

—

3

7-1/2

—

7-1/2

10

25

7-1/2

15

30

10

25

50

10

25

50

AN19DN0_ 5E _

AN19GN0_ 5E _

AN19KN0_ 5E _

AN59DN0_ 5E _

AN59GN0_ 5E _

AN59KN0_ 5E _

4 3

5 4

135

270

156

311

—

—

—

—

40

75

50

100

100

200

100

200

3

AN19SN0_ 5E _

3

AN59SN0_ 5E _

C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays

00

0

9

18

11

21

1/3

1

1

2

1-1/2

3

1-1/2

3

2

5

2

5

AN19AN0_ 5G _

AN19BN0_ 5G _

AN59AN0_ 5G _

AN59BN0_ 5G _

1

2

3

27

45

90

32

52

104

2

3

—

3

7-1/2

—

7-1/2

10

25

7-1/2

15

30

10

25

50

10

25

50

AN19DN0_ 5G _

AN19GN0_ 5G _

AN19KN0_ 5G _

AN59DN0_ 5G _

AN59GN0_ 5G _

AN59KN0_ 5G _

4 3

5 4

135

270

156

311

—

—

—

—

40

75

50

100

100

200

100

200

3

AN19SN0_ 5G _

3

AN59SN0_ 5G _

Suffix Coil Volts and Hertz

A

B

C

120/60 or 110/50

240/60 or 220/50

480/60 or 440/50

D

E

H

600/60 or 550/50

208/60

277/60

J

K

L

208–240/60

240/50

380–415/50

N

T

U

550/50

24/60, 24/50

24/50

V

W

Y

32/50

48/60

48/50

NEMA Size OLR Code FLA Range OLR Code FLA Rating

00 1P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A

005 1.0–5.0 A — —

01P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A

005 1.0–5.0 A — —

11P6 0.33–1.65 A 020 4.0–20 A

005 1.0–5.0 A 045 9.0–45 A

2005 1.0–5.0 A 045 9.0–45 A

020 4.0–20 A — —

3100 20–100 A — —

4 5300 — — 60–300 A

5 5300 60–300 A — —

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-19

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay

039

Accessories

Table 30.3-44. CT Kits

1Customer can wire remote-mounted button

to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton,

catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10).

Communication

The C440 is provided with two levels of

communication capability.

Basic Communication via Expansion

Module—Monitoring Only

Basic communication on the C440

is accomplished using an expansion

module. The expansion module

plugs into the expansion bay on

the C440 overload relay, enabling

communications with the overload via

their Modbus RTU (RS-485) network.

No additional parts are required.

Basic Communication—Modbus

Advanced Communication—

Monitoring and Control

C440 also has the ability to communi-

cate on industrial protocols such as

DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

and Modbus TCP, and Ethernet

(planned) while providing control

capability using I/O.

An expansion module (mentioned

earlier) combined with a communica-

tion adapter and a communication

module allows easy integration onto

the customer’s network.

Advanced Communication—

Communication Module

The communication adapter comes

standard with four inputs and two

outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while

providing the customer with flexible

mounting options (DIN rail or panel).

For more information about technical

data and specifications as well as

dimensions, see Volume 5—Motor

Control and Protection, CA08100006E,

Section 31.

Advanced Communication—

Communication Adapter

with Communication Module

Description Catalog

Number

Safety Cover

Clear Lexan® cover that mounts

on top of the FLA dial and

DIP switches when closed

ZEB-XSC

Reset Bar

Assembles to the top of the

overload to provide a larger

target area for door-mounted

reset operators

ZEB-XRB

Remote Reset

Remote reset module

(24 Vdc) 1

C440-XCOM

Remote reset module

(120 Vac) 1

ZEB-XRR-120

Remote reset module

(24 Vac) 1

ZEB-XRR-24

30.3-20

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

XT IEC Power Control

040

XT IEC Power Control

XT IEC Power Control

Product Overview

The XT line of IEC power control offers

starting and protection solutions ideal

for control panels.

Innovations in the design and develop-

ment allow users to reduce material

costs, reduce installation effort, and

enhance panel safety and performance

all in a compact design. Some of these

key innovations include:

■Toolless assembly of manual motor

controllers and reversing contactors

■Low coil consumption

■Front accessibility to coil terminations

■Built-in surge suppression on

electronic coils

■Built-in auxiliary contact for

contactors up to 32 A in a

45 mm frame

■Finger-safe and back-of-hand

proof ratings

■Direct PLC control on 185–2000 A

contactors

The XT line includes a large offering

of power control components and

accessories that cover a broad range

of applications and ratings:

■Three-pole contactors to 2000 A

■Four-pole contactors to 200 A

■Capacitor contactors to 680 kvar

■Mini contactors to 9 A

■Relays to 16 A

■Thermal overload relays to 630 A

■Electronic overload relays to 1500 A

■Manual motor protectors to 65 A

■Manual motor controllers and

combination motor controllers

to 65 A

Contactors and Starters

Product Description

The Eaton XT contactors and starters

includes non-reversing and reversing

contactors, overload relays and a

variety of related accessories. Because

XT meets IEC, UL®, CSA® and CE

standards, it is the perfect product

solution for IEC applications all over

the world. The compact, space

saving and easy to install

XT

line of IEC

contactors and starters is the efficient

and effective solution for customer

applications from 7 A to 2450 A.

Application Description

The XT line of IEC power control was

engineered to provide highly effective

control and protection for a variety of

loads, including motors, compressors,

pumps, resistive, capacitor banks,

isolation, and others. XT also includes

IEC ratings for lighting applications

as well.

XT contactors can be used in safety

applications according to EN 954-1,

EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061 up to

Category 4, Pl e and SIL 3. Information

concerning safety-related

characteris-

tics (B10 and B10d

values) is available

online. The auxiliary contact modules

and built-in auxiliary contacts meet

IEC EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively

driven) and IEC EN 60947-4-1 Annex F

(mirror contacts).

Features and Benefits

■AC control from 12 V to 600 V

50/60 Hz

■DC control from 12 V to 220 V

■Available with screw or spring

cage terminals

■Reversing or non-reversing

contactors and starters

■AC-3 contactor ratings to 1000 A and

AC-1 contactor ratings to 2000 A

■Non-reversing starters to 650 A

■Panel or DIN rail mounting to 65 A

■IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof

■Large ambient temperature range,

–25 to 50 °C (–13 to 122 °F)

■AC and DC controlled contactors in

the same compact frame

■Low power consumption AC and

DC coils

■Built-in NO or NC auxiliary contacts

to 32 A

■Plug-in accessories for reduced

installation time

■Coil replacement on Frames C–N

(18–820 A)

■Contact replacement on Frames D–N

(40 –820 A)

■Integrated suppressor 7–150 A DC

operated contactors and 185–2000 A

AC and DC operated contactors

Standards and Certifications

■IEC EN 60947

■CE approved

■UL

■CSA

■ATEX

■RoHS

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-21

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

XT IEC Power Control

041

Technical Data

Table 30.3-45. XT Coil Data

Integrated suppressor

7–150 A DC operated contactors

and 185–2000 A AC and DC operated

contactors.

Table 30.3-46. Coil Data Notes

All data is based on a standard

contactor and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc

magnet coil. Coil data has a ±5%

range depending on the application,

therefore, specific data may vary.

XT

Frame

Motor

Volt age

Max.

hp

Rating

P.U. (x Uc) P.U. Sealed Maximum

Operation

Rate

Operations/

Hour

P. U .

Time ms

D.O.

Time ms

AC DC VA Watts Watts

(DC)

VA Watts Wa tts

(DC)

B200

230

460

575

5

5

10

10

0.8–1.1 0.8–1.1 30 23 4.5 4.4 1.4 4.5 9000 21 18

C200

230

460

575

10

10

20

25

0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 67 50 12.0 9 2.6 0.5 5000 22 14

D200

230

460

575

20

25

50

60

0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 178 117 24.0 19 5.3 0.5 5000 18 13

F200

230

460

575

25

40

75

100

0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 345 190 90.0 30 7.1 1.3 3600 20 14

G200

230

460

575

40

60

125

125

0.8–1.1 0.7–1.2 170 130 149.0 3.1 2.1 2.1 3600 33 41

H200

230

460

575

60

75

150

200

0.8–1.15 0.8–1.15 210 180 180 2.6 2.1 2.1 3000 60 40

L200

230

460

575

100

125

250

300

0.7–1.15 07–1.15 250

380

(300 A)

200

250

(300 A)

200

250

(300 A)

4.3 3.3 3.3 3000 100

80

(300 A)

80

110

(300 A)

M200

230

460

575

150

200

400

500

0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 450 350 350 4.3 3.3 3.3 2000 80 80

N200

230

460

575

350

420

850

980

0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 800 700 700 7.5 6.5 6.5 1000 70 70

R200

230

460

575

560

640

1200

1300

0.7–1.15 0.7–1.15 1600 1400 1400 15.0 13.0 13.0 1000 70 40

Description

P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken

from closing of the coil circuit to main

contact touch.

D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken

from opening of the coil circuit to main

contact separation.

Cold Coil data with a cold coil.

30.3-22

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

XT IEC Power Control

042

Table 30.3-47. Specifications

Frame R N M L H G F D C B

Catalog Number Series XTCE1600 XTCE750 XTCE500 XTCE300A XTCE225A XTCE150 XTCE095 XTCE072 XTCE032 XTCE015

Electrical Data

AC-3 at 400 V (A) 1600 750 500 300 225 150 95 72 32 15.5

Electrical Life 300,000 1,400,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 1,300,000 1,300,000 750,000 1,300,000 800,000

Maximum Operating Freq.

AC-3 (Ops./h)

380 500 850 850 1000 800 800 800 800 1000

AC-1 at 40 °C (A) 2200 1102 857 490 386 190 130 98 45 22

Max. Nominal Power

460 V (hp)

1200 600 400 250 150 125 75 40 20 10

General

Mechanical Life 5,000,000 5,000,000 7,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000

Width (mm) 515 250 160 140 140 90 90 55 45 45

Height (mm) 392 296 200 200 164 170 170 115 85 68

Depth (mm) 252 232 216 216 208 150 150 132.1 97 75

Weight (kg) 32 15 8 8 6.5 2 2 0.9 0.42 0.23

Min. Ambient

Temperature (°C)

–25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25 –25

Max. Ambient

Temperature (°C)

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

Contacts

Wire Range

Solid or Stranded (AWG)

2/0–500

kcmil

2/0–500

kcmil

1/0–250

kcmil

2/0–500

kcmil

1/0–350

kcmil

8–3/0 8–3/0 14–1 14–8 18–14

Power Terminal Torque

Lb/In (Nm)

311 (35) 213 (24) 213 (24) 213 (24) 213 (24) 123.9 (14) 123.9 (14) 29.2 (3.3) 26.6 (3) 10.6 (1.2)

Control Circuit 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14 18–14

Control Terminal Torque 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 (1.2)

Auxiliary Contacts

Number of Auxiliary Contact

Modules in Basic Unit

4444400011

Number of Additional

Auxiliary Contact Modules

4444488644

Ie AC-15/230 V (A) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4

Mounting Method

Dimensions of Drilled Hole

Width A (mm])

430 165 130 130 120 70 70 45 35 35

Dimensions of Drilled Hole

Height B (mm)

270 215 180 180 160 156 156 105 75 60

Mounting Screws 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 4xM6 2xM4 2xM4 2xM4

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-23

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Thermal Overload Relays

043

Thermal Overload Relays

XTOB, XTOT Overload Relays

Product Description

The XT line of IEC motor thermal

overload relays provides an efficient

motor protection solution, available

up to 630 A. XTOB units can be

directly mounted to the contactor

or mounted separately.

Features and Benefits

■Direct connect up to 250 A

■Stand alone and CT type up to 630 A

■Large thermal overcurrent range

■Test button

■Manual/automatic selectable reset

■NO-NC auxiliary as standard

■Class 10A (to 250 A)

■Class 30 (CT type)

Standards and Certifications

■IEC EN 60947

■CE approved

■UL

■CSA

■ATEX

■RoHS

Note: Short-circuit protection: Observe

the maximum permissible fuse of the

contactor with direct device mounting.

See MN03402001E for more information

on overload relays for Frames B–G.

Trip Class: 10A

Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors.

EC prototype test certificate available

upon request. See manuals MN03402001E

and MN03407001E.

Instructional Leaflets

■Pub51221: XTOB, D Frame overload

relays (inside of packaging)

■Pub51222: XTOB, B–C Frame over-

load relays (inside of packaging)

Tripping Characteristics

These tripping characteristics are the

mean values of the spread at 20 °C

ambient temperature in a cold state.

Tripping time depends on response

current. With devices at operating

temperature, the tripping time

of the overload relay reduces to

approximately 25% of the read off

value. Specific characteristics for

each individual setting range can be

found in MN03402001E.

Figure 30.3-11. XTOB...BC1, XTOB...CC1,

XTOB...DC1

Figure 30.3-12. XTOB...GC1

Figure 30.3-13. XTOB...HC1, XTOB...LC1

2h

100

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

XTOB...BC1,

XTOB...CC1,

XTOB...DC1

1 1.5 2 3 4 68 10 15 20

x Setting Current

2-Phase

Seconds Minutes

3-Phase

2h

100

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

XTOB...GC1

1 1.5 2 3 4 68 10 15 20

x Setting Current

2-Phase

Seconds Minutes

3-Phase

2h

100

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

XTOB...HC1,

XTOB...LC1

1 1.5 2 3 4 68 10 15 20

x Setting Current

2-Phase

Seconds Minutes

3-Phase

30.3-24

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Thermal Overload Relays

044

Technical Data

Table 30.3-48. Direct Mount to XT Contactors—For Use with XT Contactor Frame

Frame Overload

Releases, Ir

Contact

Sequence

Contact

Configuration

For Use with

Contactor

Ampere Range

Fuse Type 1

Coordination,

gG/gL

Ty p e 2

Coordination,

gG/gL

Maximum

Circuit

Breaker

CEC/

NEC

Fuse

Catalog

Number

B 0.1–0.16

0.16–0.24

0.24–0.4

0.4–0.6

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

7–15 A

7–15 A

7–15 A

7–15 A

25

25

25

25

0.5

1

2

4

25

25

25

25

3

3

3

3

XTOBP16BC1

XTOBP24BC1

XTOBP40BC1

XTOBP60BC1

0.6–1

1–1.6

1.6–2.4

2.4–4

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

7–15 A

7–15 A

7–15 A

7–15 A

25

25

25

25

4

6

10

16

25

25

25

25

3

6

6

15

XTOB001BC1

XTOB1P6BC1

XTOB2P4BC1

XTOB004BC1

4–6

6–10

9–12

12–16

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

7–15 A

7–15 A

9–15 A

12–15 A

25

50

50

50

20

25

25

25

25

25

25

30

20

35

45

45

XTOB006BC1

XTOB010BC1

XTOB012BC1

XTOB016BC1

C 0.1–0.16

0.16–0.24

0.24–0.4

0.4–0.6

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

25

25

25

25

0.5

1

2

4

25

25

25

25

3

3

3

3

XTOBP16CC1

XTOBP24CC1

XTOBP40CC1

XTOBP60CC1

0.6–1

1–1.6

1.6–2.4

2.4–4

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

25

25

25

25

4

6

10

16

25

25

25

25

3

6

6

15

XTOB001CC1

XTOB1P6CC1

XTOB2P4CC1

XTOB004CC1

4–6

6–10

10–16

16–24

24–32

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

18–32 A

25–32 A

25

50

63

100

125

20

25

35

35

63

25

25

30

30

30

20

25

25

25

25

XTOB006CC1

XTOB010CC1

XTOB016CC1

XTOB024CC1

XTOB032CC1

D6–10

10–16

16–24

24–40

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

40–72 A

40–72 A

40–72 A

40–72 A

50

63

63

125

25

35

50

63

25

25

30

125

25

25

25

125

XTOB010DC1

XTOB016DC1

XTOB024DC1

XTOB040DC1

40–57

50–65

65–75

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

50–72 A

65–72 A

72 A

160

160

200

80

100

125

150

150

150

150

200

200

XTOB057DC1

XTOB065DC1

XTOB075DC1

F–G 25–35

35–50

50–70

70–100

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

80–170 A

80–170 A

80–170 A

80–170 A

125

160

250

315

100

125

160

200

125

150

150

400

125

200

200

400

XTOB035GC1

XTOB050GC1

XTOB070GC1

XTOB100GC1

95–125

120–150

145–175

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

80–170 A

80–170 A

150–170 A

315

315

315

200

200

200

500

600

600

400

600

600

XTOB125GC1

XTOB150GC1

XTOB175GC1

2 4 6 98 96 A214/

22

97 95

2 4 6 98 9614/

22

97 95

2469896

97 95

2469896

97 95

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-25

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Thermal Overload Relays

045

Table 30.3-49. Separate Mount to XT Contactors—For Use with XT Contactor Frame

1For separate mounting, short-circuit Type 1 rating is 500 A and short-circuit Type 2 rating is 400 A.

2The main current parameters are defined by the main current wiring that is used.

3Go datasheet.moeller.net for more information complete data sheet by Article number.

Frame Overload

Releases, Ir

Contact

Sequence

Contact

Configuration

For Use with

Contactor

Ampere Range

Fuse Type 1

Coordination,

gG/gL

Ty p e 2

Coordination,

gG/gL

Maximum

Circuit

Breaker

CEC/

NEC

Fuse

Catalog

Number

F–G 25–35

35–50

50–70

70–100

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

80–170 A

80–170 A

80–170 A

80–170 A

125

160

250

315

100

125

160

200

125

150

150

400

125

200

200

400

XTOB035GC1S

XTOB050GC1S

XTOB070GC1S

XTOB100GC1S

95–125

120–150

145–175

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

80–170 A

80–170 A

150–170 A

315

315

315

250

250

250

500

600

600

400

600

600

XTOB125GC1S

XTOB150GC1S

XTOB175GC1S

H 50–70

70–100

95–125

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

185–250 A

185–250 A

185–250 A

250

315

315

160

200

250

150

400

500

200

400

400

XTOB070HC1

XTOB100HC1

XTOB125HC1

120–160

160–220

200–250

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

185–250 A

185–250 A

225–250 A

400

400 1

400 1

250

315 1

315 1

600

600

600

600

800

700

XTOB160HC1

XTOB220HC1

XTOB250HC1

L 50–70

70–100

95–125

120–160

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

185–250 A

185–250 A

185–250 A

185–250 A

250

315

315

400

160

200

250

250

150

400

500

600

200

400

400

600

XTOB070LC1

XTOB100LC1

XTOB125LC1

XTOB160LC1

160–220

200–250

200–300

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

185–250 A

225–250 A

225–300 A

400 1

400 1

630 1

315 1

315 1

630 1

600

600

600

800

700

700

XTOB220LC1

XTOB250LC1

XTOB300LC1

M–N

(CT

Operated)

42–63

60–90

85–125

110 – 1 6 0

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

300–500 A

300–500 A

300–500 A

300–500 A

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

150

250

500

600

200

250

400

600

XTOT063C3S

XTOT090C3S

XTOT125C3S

XTOT160C3S

160–240

190–290

270–400

360–540

420–630

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

300–500 A

300–500 A

300–500 A

500 A

630 A

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

600

600

100 0

600

600

700

700

1000

1000

1000

XTOT240C3S

XTOT290C3S

XTOT400C3S

XTOT540C3S

XTOT630C3S

2469896

97 95

24 6

12 5

98 96

97 95

24 6

12 5

98 96

97 95

98 96

97 95

30.3-26

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Thermal Overload Relays

046

Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.3-14. Frames B–C, XTOBXDINC DIN Rail or Panel Mount

Adapter and Frame D, XTOBXDIND DIN Rail or Panel Mount Adapter Figure 30.3-15. Frames F–G, XTOB…GC1 Overload Relay

Figure 30.3-16. Frames F–G, XTOB…G1CS Overload Relay

Figure 30.3-17. Frames L and H, XTOB…LC1, HC1 Overload Relay

HWD D1D2

XTOB…CC1 3.46 (85.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3.56 (90.5) 2.30 (58.3) 0.15 (3.8)

XTOB…DC1 3.39 (86.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.41 (112.0) 3.17 (80.5) 0.19 (4.7)

0.20 (5.0)

H

0.65 (16.5)

D2

1.67

(42.5)

W

D

D1

5.43

(138.0)

2.48 (63.0)

5.08 (129.0)

3.94 (100.0)

5.28 (134.0)

2.91

(74.0)

4.65 (118.0)

3.90 (99.0)

3.15 (80.0)

3.74 (95.0)

2.87 (73.0)

2.48 (63.0)

5.08 (129.0)

5.28 (134.0)

4.76

(121.0)

2.91

(74.0)

3.94 (100.0)

3.90 (99.0)

4.65 (118.0)

3.74 (95.0)

4.76 (121.0)

4.33 (110.0)

3.78 (96.0)

5.04 (128.0)

2.91

(74.0)

5.67

(144.0)

6.65

(169.0)

1.89 (48.0)

0.98

(25.0)

0.20

(5.0) 0.65

(16.5)

5.67 (144.0)

14.37 (11.0)

3.70

(94.0)

0.28

(7.0)

0.28 (7.0) Dia.

0.43 (11.0) Dia.

*

**

*

** * = OFF

** = RESET/ON

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-27

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Thermal Overload Relays

047

Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.3-18. Frames B–C, XTOB…BC1 and XTOB…CC1 Overload

Relays

Figure 30.3-19. Frame D, XTOB…DC1 Overload Relay

Figure 30.3-20. XTOT…C3S Current Transformer Operated Overload Relay

1.77 (45.0) 3.27 (83.0)

2.56 (65.0)

1.89

(48.0)

1.40

(35.5)

1.56

(39.5)

1.16

(29.5)

2.36 (60.0) 4.02 (102.0)

3.76 (95.5)

2.03

(51.5)

3.12

(79.2)

0.80

(20.3)

0.30 (7.5)

1.02

(26.0)

2.17

(55.0)

0.83 (21.0)

3.35

(85.0)

7.28 (185.0)

2.80

(71.0) 1.73 (44.0) 1.30

(33.0)

0.31 (8.0) 0.17 (4.3) 7.28 (185.0)

M4

1.73

(44.0)

1.02 (26.0)

2.17

(55.0)

0.06 (1.5)

6.26 (159.0)

6.77–9.84

(172.0–250.0)

*

*

* = RESET/ON

90° 90°

7.87 (200.0)

2.56

(65.0)

2.56

(65.0)

2.80

(71.0)

1.06

(27.0)

90°

30.3-28

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Combination Motor Controllers

048

Combination Motor Controllers

Combination Motor Controllers

General Description

Eaton’s XT IEC open non-reversing and

reversing manual motor controllers

combine a manual motor protector

with an IEC contactor(s) to provide a

complete motor protection solution by

combining motor disconnect function,

thermal overload protection, magnetic

short-circuit protection and remote

control operation in one compact,

assembled unit. these assembled

manual motor controllers cover motors

with FLA ratings from 0.10 A to 65 A.

The UL 508 Type F labeled combination

motor controller (CMC) includes a line

side adapter (LSA). These assembled

combination motor controllers cover

motors with FLA ratings from 0.10 A

to 65 A.

Application Description

The XT IEC non-reversing and

reversing manual and combination

motor controllers can be used in the

following applications:

Group Motor Control

Manual motor controllers (MMCs)

are ideal for group motor applications

where an upstream breaker or fuse

provides protection for two or more

motors. XT manual motor controllers

(MMC) combine a manual motor

protector, a wiring connector link

and IEC contactor.

Individual Branch Circuit for Motor Loads

Combination motor controller (CMC),

consisting of a line side adapter, manual

motor protector, wiring connector link

and IEC contactor, provide an efficient

means to build an entire branch circuit.

The XT CMC is UL 508 Type F approved,

meaning it is “self-protected” and

doesn’t require the use of an additional

fuse or breaker for short circuit protec-

tion. This approval means CMC’s can be

used in place of a traditional fuse-starter

and breaker-starter motor circuit.

Based around two key functional

components (MMP and contactor),

the CMC is a very cost effective means

to build a branch circuit. Fuses and

breakers must be oversized to prevent

tripping during motor start up, and

thus these oversized devices can

no longer protect the motor. To

compensate for this, a motor overload

relay is necessary to protect the motor.

The manual motor protector was

invented in Germany by Moeller to

correct this inefficiency. The MMP

operates similarly to a circuit breaker,

except the inrush (magnetic) protection

is set to 14 times the running current,

thus accounting for motor start-up

current without the necessity to over-

size. A overcurrent dial was added to

the face of the MMP to serve as the

motor overload protection. This

“motor protective circuit breaker”, as

it is referred to in Europe, now accom-

plishes all four key functions of a motor

branch circuit: disconnect, short circuit,

motor controller and motor overload

protection. With the addition of a

contactor, users have the ability to

remotely control the starter device.

Whether a single motor application or

a multiple motor application, CMCs

are an ideal solution for machinery

OEMs and panel builders.

Features

■ON/OFF rotary handle with

lockout provision

■Visible trip indication

■Test trip function

■Motor applications from

0.10 A to 65 A

■Class 10 overload protection

■Built-in heater and magnetic trip

elements to protect the motor

■Phase loss sensitivity

■Type 2 coordination

■Ambient compensated up

to 55 °C (140 °F)

■Control inputs located at front of

starter for easy access and wiring

■Wide range of coils

■DIN rail mount—XTSC…BB_

■Mounting plates—XTSC…BC_,

XTSC…D motor controllers

■Adjustment dial for setting

motor FLA

■Short-circuit trip at 14 times the

maximum setting of the FLA

adjustment dial

■UL 508 Type F CMC high fault

short-circuit ratings

■1NO-1NC auxiliary contact as

standard on manual motor controller

and combination motor controller

Standards and Certifications

■UL 508 Type F combination

motor controller

■IEC Type 2 Approved per

IEC 60947-4-1

■UL Listed File No. E245398

■CE Mark

Figure 30.3-21. MMC and CMC Applications

Note: Technical Paper AP03402001E. Line side adapters are not required for non-U.S.

applications. Most countries outside of the U.S. classify the MMP as a motor-protective

circuit breaker.

1SCPD = Short-circuit protective device (circuit breaker, fuses).

2MMC = Manual motor controller

Combination Motor Controller

XTFC/XTFR

Line Side Adapter (LSA)

Not required

Line Side Adapter (LSA)

Required—factory assembled

XTIEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers

Manual Motor Controller

Use in group installation applications.

Upstream SCPD 1 is required and must

be sized smaller than the maximum

upstream SCPD 1 rating on each MMC 2

used. Tap rules should also be observed.

UL 508 Type F Combination Motor Controller

Use for single motor branch circuits or use multiple

CMC’s for a multiple motor panel applications. No

additional SCPD 1 is required in the branch, as these

devices are “self-protected”.

Manual Motor Controller

XTSC/XTSR

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-29

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Combination Motor Controllers

049

Technical Data

Table 30.3-50. Combination Motor Controller Ratings

Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.3-22. XTSC…BB_

Frame MMP/

Frame

Contactor

FLA

Maximum

Adjustment

Short Circuit

Release—Irm

(Amperes)

Three-Phase Hp UL Three-Phase kW IEC Non-

Reversing

Catalog

Reversing

Catalog

200 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 220–240 V 380–415 V 500 V 660–690 V

Manual Motor Controller/Starter Combinations

B/B

B/C

D/C

D/D

16

32

32

65

224

448

448

882

3

7. 5

7. 5

15

3

10

10

15

10

20

20

40

7. 5

25

30

30

4

7. 5

7. 5

18.5

7. 5

15

15

34

9

22

17.5

37

12.5

30

22

55

XTSC_____

XTSC_____

XTSC_____

XTSC_____

XTSR_____

XTSR_____

XTSR_____

XTSR_____

Combination Motor Controllers (CMC), UL 508 Type F

B/B

B/C

D/C

D/D

16

32

32

65

224

448

448

882

3

7. 5

7. 5

15

5

10

10

15

10

20

25

40

7. 5

—

30

30

4

7. 5

7. 5

18.5

7. 5

15

15

34

9

22

17.5

37

12.5

30

22

55

XTFC_____

XTFC_____

XTFC_____

XTFC_____

XTFR______

XTFR______

XTFR______

XTFR______

1.96 (49.7)

to Terminals

1.77

(45.0)

3.77

(95.7)

7.03

(178.5)

1.28 (32.5)

to Terminals

30.3-30

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Combination Motor Controllers

050

Figure 30.3-23. XTSR…BB_

Figure 30.3-24. XTSC…BC_

1.96 (49.7)

to Terminals

3.55

(90.3)

1.28 (32.5)

to Terminals

3.75

(95.3)

7.22

(183.4)

Mounting Holes

for M4 Screws

or #8 Screws

(4 Places)

1.34

(34.0)

8.30 (210.8)

Mounting

0.35 (9.0)

3.42

(86.8)

to Terminals

1.78

(45.2)

2.26 (57.5)

to Terminals

4.89

(124.3)

9.01

(228.8)

9.28

(235.7)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-31

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

Combination Motor Controllers

051

Figure 30.3-25. XTSC…DD

5.62

(142.8)

to Coil

Terminals

3.28 (83.4)

to Terminals

7.72 (196.0)

6.24

(158.5)

6.78 (172.1)

to Optional Aux. Contacts

Mounting Holes for

M5 Screws or #10 Screws

(4 Places)

2.17

(55.0)

1.71 (43.4)

Mounting

10.47 (266.0)

Mounting

0.35 (9.0)

11.18

(284.0)

30.3-32

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector

052

XT Electronic Manual

Motor Protector

XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector

General Description

The XT Electronic Manual Motor

Protector provides the same

functionality as the XT thermal manual

motor protector, but with an added

level of flexibility and selectability. The

XTPE incorporates electronic control

technology to enable more options and

larger dial setting ranges. The trip units

are interchangeable, allowing users

to exchange as needed using the same

base. The reduced number of part

numbers decreases bill of material

complexity while reducing inventory

demands. The XTPE electronic

manual motor protector includes

the following features:

■4:1 maximum to minimum

overcurrent dial setting range

■Selectable trip class (5, 10, 15, 20)

■Interchangeable trip units

■Three base units (12, 32 and 65 A)

■Common accessories with the XTPR

Features and Benefits

Advanced Trip Unit

In addition to the selectability, the XTPE

is also available with an advanced trip

unit that can communicate system

data and protector data through

SmartWire-DT®. SmartWire-DT is an

innovative cost-effective connection

technology that enables quick installa-

tion of control wiring to the starter

through a single green cable. When

on SmartWire-DT, the XTPE can

communicate the following:

■Current values

❑Maximum phase current

❑Overload warning

■Diagnostics data

❑Overload fault

❑Cause of trip (overcurrent or short

circuit)

❑Phase loss

❑Trip via TEST

■Status messages

❑Control unit type

❑Overload setting

❑Time-lag

❑Switching status

XTPE Electronic MMP

The XTPE Electronic MMP provides

the selectability, control, and insight

options that give panel builders and

OEMs the solutions necessary to

enhance motor control designs while

reducing total costs.

Standards and Certifications

■CE approved

■UL Listed File No. E36332

■UL 508 group motor and Type E

■IEC/EN 60947

■CSA File 012528, Class 3211-05

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-33

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

XT Electronic Manual Motor Protector

053

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.3-51. XT—Manual Motor Protector Catalog Numbering System

Table 30.3-52. XT—Combinations Catalog Numbering System

Trip Characteristics

Figure 30.3-26. XT Electronic Manual Motor Controllers

Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.3-27. XT Electronic MMP—B Frame

Figure 30.3-28. XT Electronic MMP—D Frame

XT PE 004 BCS

Type

PE = Electronic MMP

Designation

XT = XT line of IEC control

Overload Release

1P2 = 0.3–1.2 A

004 = 1–4 A

012 = 3–12 A

032 = 8–32 A

065 = 16–65 A

Trip Type

CS = Standard

CA = Advanced (SmartWire-DT)

MMP Frame

B = 45 mm

D = 55 mm

Type

FCE = Electronic combination

motor controller

Designation

XT = XT line of IEC control

XT FCE 004 B C CS A

Overload Release

1P2 = 0.3–1.2 A

004 =1–4 A

012 =3–12 A

032 =8–32 A MMP Frame

B = 45 mm Trip Type

CS = Selectable class 5, 10, 15, 20

CA = Selectable, advanced

Coil Voltage

A= 110 V 50 Hz, 120 V 60 Hz

B= 220 V 50 Hz, 240 V 60 Hz

F= 230 V 50 Hz

T= 24 V 50/60 Hz

TD= 24 Vdc

Contactor Frame

C = 45 mm

XTPE …

1.77

(45.0)

4.72 (120.0)

3.79 (96.2)

3.98

(101.0)

4.65 (118.0)

2.22

(56.5)

2.17

(55.0)

1.38

(35.0)

6.30

(160.0)

0.57

(14.5)

1.28

(32.5)

0.22 (5.5)

5.00 (127.0)

6.77 (172.0)

7.36 (187.0)

30.3-34

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

EMS—Electronic Motor Starter

054

EMS—Electronic

Motor Starter

EMS—Electronic Motor Starter

General Description

The electronic motor starter (EMS)

is the latest technology in safe and effi-

cient motor starting from Eaton’s

Electrical Sector. The EMS is a full

starter with built-in solid-state contacts

and integral overload protection. Its

compact size and high-electrical life

make it an ideal replacement for the

traditional contactor/overload relay

starter configuration.

Application Description

A versatile solution, the EMS also

supports the following installation

applications:

■Logistics

■Conveyer control

■Production machines

■To o l i n g m achine s

■Packaging machines

■Small elevators

Features and Benefits

Multifunctional

The EMS comes with an optional

reversing start feature, eliminating

the need for an additional contactor.

The optional E-stop functionality

eliminates the need for a separate

E-stop contactor. Available with

SmartWire-DT connection, reducing

installation cost and providing

communication means of critical data.

Extended Life

High-electrical life provides up to

30 million operations. The EMS is ideal

for customer applications requiring

multiple motor start/stops per hour.

Easy Installation

The EMS comes equipped with

push-in terminals for quick and easy

wiring of power and control circuits.

Push-in terminals provide 60% time

savings over screw-in terminals and

better contact against vibrations.

Standards and Certifications

■UL

Safety Rated

Functional safety is growing in

importance for the machinery OEM.

The EMS is rated at SIL3 per IEC 62061

and PLe per ISO® 13849, meeting the

most stringent of safety requirements.

The EMS carries IEC and UL short-

circuit ratings, with 100 kAIC UL short-

circuit rating when mated with 30 A

Class J fuse.

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.3-53. EMS—Electronic Motor Starter Catalog Numbering System

EMS ROS T 2.4 24VDC

Configuration/

Function

DO = Non-reversing

DOS = Non-reversing

with E-stop

RO = Reversing

ROS = Reversing

with E-stop

Device Type

EMS = Electronic

motor starter

Ampere Rating

2.4 = 2.4 A

9=9 A

Control Voltage

24VDC = 24 Vdc

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.3-35

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Motor Starters—Electromechanical

EMS—Electronic Motor Starter

055

Dimensions

Figure 30.3-29. EMS without SmartWire-DT

Figure 30.3-30. EMS with SmartWire-DT

Figure 30.3-31. Trip Type EMS

Table 30.3-54. Rated Operational Current EMS-…-SWD

1.18

(30.0)

6.18

(157.0)

4.86 (123.5)

1.18

(30.0) 4.88 (124.0)

6.18

(157.0)

Temperature (ºC) 40 45 50 55 60

EMS-…- 2,4 - SWD

Stand-alone device 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4

Connected in series, with a distance

equal to one housing width

2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4

Connected in series, without

any distance

2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 —

EMS-…- 9 - SWD

Stand-alone device 9 9 9 9 7.6

Connected in series, with a distance

equal to one housing width

997.67.65.2

Connected in series, without

any distance

7.6 6.8 5.2 2.4 —

[s]

12345678910I / In

1

10

100

1000

60 40

30 20

600 400

300 200

64

32

0.6 0.4

0.3 0.2

0

10

[s]

12345678910I / In

1

10

100

1000

60 40

30 20

600 400

300 200

64

32

0.6 0.4

0.3 0.2

0

10 A

EMS-…-9-…(Ir > 4A)

EMS-…-2,4-…

EMS-…-9-…(Ir ≤ 4A)

30.3-36

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

056

This page intentionally left blank.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.4-1

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

General Description

057

Low Voltage Reduced Voltage

Starter Selection Guide

In general, the application will determine the type of starter required. In cases where more than one type starter will meet

the application requirements, reference to the table below will show which starter is best suited for the application.

Table 30.4-1. Reduced Voltage Starting Characteristics and Index

1Includes autotransformer magnetizing current.

General Application

The following factors should be

considered when applying reduced-

voltage starters to a squirrel cage

motor-driven load.

1. The motor characteristics that will

satisfy the starting requirements of

the load.

2. The source of power and the effect

the motor starting current will have

on the line voltage.

3. The load characteristics and the

effect the motor starting torque will

have on the driven parts

during acceleration.

The starter protection required to

protect the load, motor, starter, cables

and power source during overload,

undervoltage and fault conditions.

A typical NEMA B motor started with

full voltage will develop as much as

150% full-load torque when started with

a starting current of around 600% full-

load current. These values may exceed

the mechanical limitations of the load

or electrical limitations of the source, or

both.

A reduced-voltage or reduced-inrush

starter will reduce both starting current

and starting torque. Care must be taken

when meeting power company limita-

tions that the motor will produce suffi-

cient torque to accelerate the load to

near rated speed.

Part-winding starters are suited to

low starting torque loads such as

fans, blowers and m-g sets. Autotrans-

former starters should be used with

“hard to start” loads such as reciprocat-

ing compressors, grinding mills, and

pumps. Wye-delta starters are applica-

ble to high inertia loads with long accel-

eration times which as centrifugal

compressors and centrifuges.

All starters, in addition to overload pro-

tection, will provide either low voltage

release or low voltage protection

depending upon the pilot device used

with the starter. Low voltage release,

where power is applied to the motor

after a power failure, can be obtained by

using a two-wire pilot device

(temperature, switch and so on). Low

voltage protection, where power is not

applied to the motor after a power failure

until restarted by an operator, can be

obtained by using three-wire control

such as START STOP pushbuttons.

Closed transition wye-delta types

require adequate ventilation to remove

resistor heat.

Eaton also offers a line of solid-state

reduced-voltage starters known as

Easy-start.

Solid-state starters are ideally suited for

many loads including conveyor applica-

tions since they provide controlled accel-

eration from zero to full load.

UL listing—Combination E176513,

Non-Combination E19224.

Starting Characteristics

Figure 30.4-1. Autotransformer Starting Figure 30.4-2. Wye-Delta or Part

Winding Starting Figure 30.4-3. Solid-State Starter

Starter

Ty p e

Starting Characteristics Expressed in %

of Rated Starting Values (Approximate)

Remarks

Page

Motor

Voltage

Motor

Current

Line

Current

To r q u e

Autotransformer

Class ECA42

80% Tap

65% Tap

50% Tap

80

65

50

80

65

50

67 1

45 1

28 1

64

42

25

The adjustable voltage taps permit wide adjustment of characteristics

in the field.

30.4-2

Part winding

Class ECA45

100 65 65 50 Requires part winding motor. A nine-lead 230/460 V dual voltage motor

may be used in 230 V applications. Closed transition.

30.4-3

Wye-delta

Class ECA48

Class ECA51

100 33 33 33 Requires delta wound motor with wye connections.

Ideal for long accelerations. Closed transition is available.

30.4-4

Solid-state

S801/811

S611

DS6/DS7

Ramps

0–100%

Adjustable

0–92%

Adjustable

0–92%

Adjustable

0–85%

Compatible with NEMA Design A, B or C motors.

Adjustable ramp up and ramp down.

30.5-1

thru

30.5-49

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

Full Voltage Starting

Full Load Current

Autotransformer

Starting on 65% T ap

Motor Speed Full Load

Speed

Line Current, % of Full Load

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

Full Voltage Starting

Part Winding Starting

Wye-Delta Starting

(Closed Transition)

Full Load Current

Line Current, % of Full Load

Motor Speed Full Load

Speed

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

KVA

Torque

Line Current, % of Full Load

10080604020

Motor Speed Full Load Speed

30.4-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

Autotransformer Type

058

General Description

Autotransformer type starters are

the most widely used reduced-voltage

starter because of their efficiency and

flexibility. All power taken from the line,

except transformer losses, is transmit-

ted to the motor to accelerate the load.

Taps on the transformer allow adjust-

ment of the starting torque and inrush to

meet the requirements of most applica-

tions. The following characteristics are

produced by the three voltage taps:

Table 30.4-2. Starting Characteristics

1Not included 50 hp and below.

2Includes transformer magnetizing current.

Closed transition is standard on all

sizes ensuring a smooth transition

from reduced to full voltage. Since

the motor is never disconnected from

the line there is no interruption of line

current which can cause a second

inrush during transition.

Duty cycle of these starters is as follows:

up to 200 hp, 15 seconds on each

4 minutes for 1 hour, repeated after

2 hours. Over 200 hp, three periods

of 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF

repeated after 1 hour.

Design Features

Contactors—(1S) (2S) (Run)

A three-pole (1S) 3 and a three-pole

contactor (2S) connect the motor to the

auto-transformer for reduced-voltage

starting (see Table 30.4-3 for size).

A three-pole contactor (Run) bypasses

the autotransformer and connects the

motor for full-voltage across-the-line

running (see Table 30.4-3 for size).

Ta p S t a r t i n g To r q u e

% Locked

To r q u e

Line Inrush

% Locked

Ampere

50% 1

65%

80%

25%

42%

64%

28% 2

45% 2

67% 2

Table 30.4-3. NEMA Contactor Size

Guidelines within Autotransformer Starters

31S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.

Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)

Closing the START button or other pilot

device energizes the start contactor

(1S). The interlock (1S) closes, energiz-

ing the timing relay (TR) and contactor

(2S) which seal in through the interlock

(2S). With the (1S) and (2S) contactors

closed, the motor is connected through

the autotransformer for reduced-volt-

age start. After a preset time interval, the

(TRTO) contacts time open, de-energiz-

ing contactor (1S) and connecting the

autotransformer as a reactor in series

with the motor. Interlock (1S) immedi-

ately energizes the run contactor (R)

which seals in through its interlock (R).

The run contacts are now closed, and

the motor is running at full voltage.

Start contactor (2S) and relay (TR) are

de-energized when interlock (R) opens.

An overload, opening the STOP push-

button or other pilot device de-ener-

gizes the (R) contactor removing the

motor from the line.

Other Types

Autotransformer starters are also

available in combination and reversing

types.

Figure 30.4-4. Typical Schematic Diagram

Table 30.4-4. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Reduced Voltage Enclosures

4Non-combination and breaker.

5Consult factory.

Maximum

hp

NEMA Size

Starter Contactor

Run Starting

(1S)

(3-Pole)

(2S)

(3-Pole)

230 V, 60 Hz

15

30

50

100

200

300

450

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

6 3

7 3

2

3

4

5

6

6

7

460–575 V, 60 Hz

25

50

100

200

400

600

900

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

6 3

7 3

2

3

4

5

6

6

7

TB1 TB1 Stop Start

TB2 TB3

T.O. = Timed Opening

TB3

PS

Auto

Hand

Off

TB1TB1

T.C. = Timed Closing

OL T1

T2

T3 Motor

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

RVNR AUTOXFMR (3-coil)

CKT BKR

or

SW & FU

#1

#2

#3

Stopped

Run

1S

TBX2

TR

T.C.

54

A1 A2

TR

On-Delay

1.5 – 15 Sec.

TB4

95 96

OL

B

G

R

E

27

86

D

C

2S

A1 A2

R

A1 A2

1S 55

53

52

2S

TR

T.O.

51

85

1S

2S

OTT OTT OTT

"C""E" "D"

Auto-Transformer

Overtemp SWa

R

1S

78910

R

R

2S

R

2S

R

2S

3C

3E

3D

5D

5E

5C

1D

1E

1C

100%

80%

65%

50%

0%

100%

80%

65%

50%

0%

100%

80%

65%

50%

0%

1S

1S

1S

Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Class 42: Autotransformer—Non-combination

Class 43: Autotransformer—with Disconnect

Class 44: Autotransformer—with HMCP

2–4 E2 124 (56) E2 149 (68)

5 F1E 885 (402) F1E 1010 (459)

6 4F1E 1220 (554) F1E 1345 (611)

6 3F2E 1400 (636) F2E 1525 (692)

7 F2E 5F2E 5

8 F2E 5F2E 5

955 55

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.4-3

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

Part-Winding Type

059

General Description

Part-winding starting provides conve-

nient, economical one-step acceleration

at reduced current where the power

company specifies a maximum or

limits the increments of current drawn

from the line. These starters can be

used with nine-lead dual-voltage

motors on the lower voltage and with

special part-winding motors designed

for any voltage. When used with dual-

voltage motors, it should be estab-

lished that the torque produced by

the first half-winding will accelerate the

load sufficiently so as not to produce

a second undesirable inrush when the

second half-winding is connected to the

line. Most motors will produce a start-

ing torque equal to between 1/2 to 2/3

of NEMA standard values with half of

the winding energized and draw about

2/3 of normal line current inrush.

Design Features

Contactors—(1M) (2M)

A three-pole contactor (1M) connects

only the first half-winding of the motor

for reduced inrush current on starting

(see table below for size). A three-pole

contactor (2M) connects the second

half-winding of the motor for running

(see table below for size).

Table 30.4-5. NEMA Contactor Size

Guidelines within Part Winding Starters

Maximum

hp

NEMA Size

Starter Contactor

(1M) (2M)

230 V, 60 Hz

15

25

50

75

150

300

1 PW

2 PW

3 PW

4 PW

5 PW

6 PW

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

460–575 V, 60 Hz

15

40

75

150

350

600

1 PW

2 PW

3 PW

4 PW

5 PW

6 PW

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

Overload Relay—(OL)

Two three-pole Type B overload

relays provide starting and running

overcurrent protection.

Timing Relay—(TR)

An electrically operated pneumatic

relay provides accurate, adjustable

start-to-run transfer timing.

Other Types

Part-winding Type ECN45 starters are

also available in combination (Type 46

and 47), reversing and three-point

(primary resistor) types.

Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)

Closing the START button or other pilot

device energizes the start contactor

(1M) which seals in through its inter-

lock (1M) and energizes the timer (TR).

The (1M) contacts connect the first

half-winding of the motor across the

line. After a preset time interval, the

timer (TRTC) contact closes energizing

contactor (2M). The (2M) contact con-

nects the second half-winding of the

motor across-the-line.

Opening the STOP button or other

pilot device de-energizes contactors

(1M), (2M) and timer (TR), removing

the motor from the line.

Table 30.4-6. Contactor Sequence

Figure 30.4-5. Typical Schematic Diagram

Table 30.4-7. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom

Reduced Voltage Enclosures

1Consult factory.

2Non-combination and breaker.

3Fusible.

Contactor Start Run

1M ●●

2M — ●

Select Overload Heater Packs for 50%

of Rated Full Load Motor Current

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

Part Winding

CKT BKR

or

SW & FU

#1

#2

#3

1M

2M

OL

OL

T1

T7

T2

T3

T8

T9

Motor

Stopped

Run

1M

TBX2

TB1 TB1 Stop Start

TB2 TB3

78

1M

1M

T.C. = Timed Closing

TB3

PS

Auto

Hand

Off

TB1TB1

TR

T.C.

5A1 A2

2M

A1 A2

TR

On-Delay 1.5 – 15 Sec.

TB4

95 96 95 96

(1M) (2M)

OL OL

A

G

R

E

27

86

Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Box

No.

Shipping

Weight

Lbs (kg)

Class 45: Part Winding—Non-combination

2PW 3 25 (11) 7 75 (34)

3PW–

4PW

9 47 (21) 9 95 (43)

5PW E 125 (47) E 180 (82)

6PW F1E 780 (354) F1E 880 (400)

7PW F2E 1F2E 1

8PW F2E 1F2E 1

Class 46: Part Winding—with Disconnect

Class 47: Part Winding—with Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Circuit Breaker

2PW C 68 (31) C 88 (40)

3PW D 162 (74) D 190 (86)

4PW E 230 (104) E 270 (123)

5PW F1E 440 (200) F1E 530 (241)

6PW 2F1E 440 (200) F1E 620 (281)

6PW 3F2E 515 (234) F2E 1

7PW F2E 1F2E 1

8PW F2E 1F2E 1

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

30.4-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

Wye-Delta Type

060

General Description

Wye-delta type starters are applied

extensively to industrial air condition-

ing installations because they are par-

ticularly suited for starting motors

driving high inertia loads with resulting

long acceleration times. They are not,

however, limited to this application.

When six- or 12-lead delta-connected

motors are started wye-connected,

approximately 58% of line voltage is

applied to each winding and the motor

develops 33% of full-voltage starting

torque and draws 33% of normal

locked-rotor current from the line.

When the motor is accelerated, it is

reconnected for normal data operation.

Design Features

Contactors—(1S) (1M) (2S) (2M)

A three-pole contactor (1S) 1 shorts

the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during

starting to connect motor in wye

(see Ta b l e 3 0 . 4 - 8 for size).

A three-pole contactor (1M) energizes

motor leads T1-T2-T3 for both wye and

delta connections (see Ta b l e 3 0 . 4 - 8

for size).

A three-pole contactor (2S) connects

resistors in series with the motor wind-

ings during the start-to-run transition

period (see Table 30.4-8 for size).

A three-pole contactor (2M) energizes

the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during run-

ning to connect the motor in delta

(see Ta b l e 3 0 . 4 - 8 for size).

Table 30.4-8. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines

11S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.

Max.

hp

NEMA Size

Starter Contactor

(1M) (2M) (1S) (2S)

230 V, 60 Hz

10

25

50

75

150

300

500

800

1 YD

2 YD

3 YD

4 YD

5 YD

6 YD

7 YD

8 YD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

4

5

6 1

7 1

1

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

460–575 V, 60 Hz

15

40

75

150

300

700

1000

1500

1 YD

2 YD

3 YD

4 YD

5 YD

6 YD

7 YD

8 YD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

4

5

6 1

7 1

1

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)

Closing the START button or other pilot

device energizes contactor (1S) whose

contacts connect the motor in a wye

connection. Interlock (1S) closes, ener-

gizing contactor (1M) and timer (TR).

The (1M) contacts energize the motor

windings in a wye. After a preset time

interval, timer (TRTC) contact closes

energizing contactor (2S). Interlock (2S)

opens, dropping out contactor (1S).

The motor is now energized in series

with the resistors. Interlock (1S) closes,

energizing contactor (2M), bypassing

the resistors and energizing the

delta connected motor at full voltage.

Interlock opens, de-energizes the timer

(TR) opening timer (TRTC) thus energiz-

ing contactor (2S).

An overload, opening the STOP button

or other pilot device de-energizes con-

tactors (1M) and (2M), removing the

motor from the line. (TRP) de-energizes

and locks out the control circuit if the

duty cycle of the transition resistors

is exceeded.

Wye-delta Class ECN51 closed transition

starters are also available in combina-

tion types and Class ECN48 open

transition non-combination and

combination starters.

Figure 30.4-6. Wye-Delta—Open Transition

Figure 30.4-7. Wye-Delta—Closed Transition

51

Elementary Diagram

Select Overload Heater Coils for 58%

of Rated Full Load Motor Current

TB4

TBX2

ON-Delay 1.5-15 Seconds

54 55

52

53

5 6

RRun

Stopped

G

7 8

Stop Start

Motor

T1

T3

T2

T5

1S

1S

1S

T4

T6

OL

1M

2M

1S 2M

1S

1M

2M

OL

9596

TR

A2

1S

A1

A2

1M

A1

A2

2M

A1

27

86

1S

1M

TR

1S

T.C.

E

Auto

TB1

TB1

TB1

TB2 TB3

TB1

Hand

OFF

TB3

PS

Shop Note:

Refer to Figure 2. Connect Green Ground

Wire to Panel Using Hole Located Adjacent

to Transformer ’s Mounting Foot.

L1L1

L2L2

L3L3

Wye-Delta Open Transition

Circuit Breaker

or Switch

and Fuse

1

2

3

T.O. = Timed Opening

T.C. = Timed Closing

85

TR

T. O .

1S

5578

2M

TB1 TB1 Stop Start

TB2 TB3

TB3

PS

Auto

Hand

Off

TB1TB1

1S

1M

TR

T.C.

55

TRP

E

27

8

1M

A1 A2

2M

A1 A2

1S 56

54

53

1S

1M

2S

A1 A2

52

6

TR

T.C.

13

27

TR

E

1S

A1 A2

51

2M 2S

Stopped

Run

On-Delay 1.5 – 15 Sec.

G

R

T.O. = Timed Opening

T.C. = Timed Closing

TB4

95 96

14

TRP

T.O.

TBX2

2M

1M

T1A

T2A

T3A

OL T1

T2

T3

Motor

T6

T4

T5

1S 1S

1S

2S

T1B

T2B

T3B

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

Wye-Delta

Closed Transition

CKT BKR

or

SW & FU

#1

#2

#3

Resistor

Resistor

Resistor

Select Overload Heater Coils

for 58% of Rated Full Load

Motor Current

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.4-5

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Electromechanical

Wye-Delta Type

061

Table 30.4-9. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures

1Non-combination and breaker.

2Fusible.

3Consult factory.

Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12

Box No. Shipping Weight

Lbs (kg)

Box No. Shipping Weight

Lbs (kg)

Classes 48 & 51: Wye-Delta—Non-combination

Classes 49 & 52: Wye-Delta—with Disconnect

Classes 50 & 53: Wye-Delta—with Thermal

Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker

2YD–4YD E 185 (84) E 225 (102)

5YD F1E 605 (275) F1E 705 (320)

6YD 1F1E 635 (288) F1E 735 (334)

6YD 2F2E 715 (325) F2E 830 (377)

7YD F2E 3F2E 3

8YD F2E 3F2E 3

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

30.4-6

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

062

This page intentionally left blank.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-1

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description—Solid-State Reduced Voltage

063

Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters

Reduced Voltage Starters

General Description

Eaton offers a complete line of solid-

state reduced voltage devices ranging

from fractional horsepower applica-

tions to 1000 A devices. The line comes

in voltages from 200 to 600 Vac and

operates on 50 or 60 Hz applications.

Units can be ordered as open

components or mounted in enclosures

(NEMA 1, 3R, 4X and 12). Motor

control center (MCC) mounting is

also possible with units through 700 hp

fitting inside of a standard MCC.

These soft starters provide reduced

voltage starting of AC induction motors.

Motor voltage is controlled by means

of back-to-back SCRs (silicon controlled

rectifiers) providing a smooth, stepless

start (and stop) of the motor driven load.

For more information, please

visit the Eaton Web site at

www.eaton.com/electrical.

Designed to control acceleration and

deceleration of three-phase motors,

products are available from 0.25 to

50 A and are suitable for mounting in a

variety of enclosures including Type 1,

12, 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9.

Application Description

Eaton’s soft starters can be applied in

a wide array of customer applications.

Typical benefits of soft starters include:

■Reduced starting torque stress on

mechanical equipment, allowing

longer life of belts, gears, pulleys and

motor shafts commonly weakened

during “across-the-line” starting

■Reduction of voltage drop during

starting on weak utility systems

where the performance of nearby

equipment would be negatively

affected

■Reduced inrush current during

starting which can result in lower

utility bills due to the reduction in

peak current demand charges

■Smooth, stepless starting of a

motor, allowing superior flexibility

over typical electromechanical

starting methods

■Ability to start large loads on backup

generators during power outages

■Elimination of the water-hammer

effect in hydraulic systems, which

can help to eliminate additional pipe

hangers and extend the life of the

system, pumps, valves and gaskets

Typical Applications

■Centrifugal and screw compressors

■Material handling equipment

■Fans and blowers

■Pumps

■Cranes and hoists

■Food processing

■Machinery

■Rock crushers

■HVAC industry

Enclosure Types

Airborne particulate may be detrimental

to starter performance and reliability,

so caution must be exercised in

choosing the enclosure best suited

to the environment. The NEMA rating

of the enclosure defines its ability

to withstand the ingress of foreign

particulate as described below:

NEMA 1

A general purpose, indoor-type

enclosure.

NEMA 12

A dust-tight and drip-tight enclosure

for indoor industrial applications.

NEMA 3R

Enclosures are intended for outdoor

use, primarily to provide a degree of

protection against falling rain, sleet

and external ice formation.

NEMA 4

A watertight and dust-tight enclosure

for either indoor or outdoor use.

NEMA 4X

Identical to NEMA 4, with the additional

requirement that the enclosure be

corrosion-proof as well.

NEMA 7/9

Enclosures capable of preventing the

entrance of dust and withstanding

pressure resulting from an internal

explosion of specified gas.

30.5-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description

064

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.5-1. Solid-State Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System

EC S 90 S 1 C A A

Type

S = Solid-state

Class

90 = Non-combination reduced voltage

soft starter—S801

91 = Combination reduced voltage

soft starter—fusible disconnect—S801

92 = Combination reduced voltage

soft starter—circuit breaker—S801

93 = Non-combination reduced voltage

soft starter—S811

94 = Combination reduced voltage

soft starter—fusible disconnect—S811

95 = Combination reduced voltage

soft starter—circuit breaker—S811

Amperes

S801/S811

Q= 37

S= 66

V= 105

W= 135

Y= 180

Z= 240

1= 304

2= 360

3= 420

4= 500

5 = 650

6 = 720

7 = 850

8 = 1000

Voltage

B = 230 V

C = 460 V

D = 575 V

E = 200 V

Q = 24 Vdc

Cover Control

See Ta b l e 3 0 . 6 - 3 for options

Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings

A= None

B= 30 A/250 V R

C= 30 A/600 V R

D= 60 A/250 V R

E= 60 A/600 V R

F= 100 A/250 V R

G= 100 A/600 V R

H= 200 A/250 V R

J= 200 A/600 V R

K= 400 A/250 V R

L= 400 A/600 V R

M= 600 A/250 V R

N= 600 A/600 V R

P= 800 A/600 V L

Q= 1200 A/600 V L

R= 1600 A/600 V L

S= 2000 A/600 V L

T= By description

Breaker

A= None

B= 3 A

C= 7 A

D= 15 A

E= 30 A

F= 50 A

W= 70 A

G= 100 A

H= 150 A

J= 250 A

K= 400 A

L= 600 A

P= 1200 A

Q= 1600 A

Enclosure Type

1 = Type 1

2 = Type 3R

3 = Type 4

4 = Type 4X (304-Grade SS)

6 = Type 7/9

8 = Type 12

9 = Type 4X (316-Grade SS)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-3

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description

065

Table 30.5-2. Solid-State Product Comparison

Table 30.5-3. Application and Environmental Considerations

The installation environment for a solid-state reduced voltage starter is of a prime concern. Conditions such as ambient

temperature, altitude and the presence of corrosives or moisture must all be considered when choosing the appropriate

starter size and enclosure type.

Note: Consult factory for applications outside of these parameters for additional information and sizing requirements.

Description S801

Soft Starter

S811 Communicating

Soft Starter

Maximum current range

Start type

Operating voltage

1–1000 A

Ramp or current limit

200–600 Vac

1–1000 A

Ramp or current limit

200–600 Vac

Operating frequency

Control voltage

Kick start

47–63 Hz

24 Vdc

0–2 seconds adjustable

47–63 Hz

24 Vdc

0–2 seconds adjustable

Ramp time range

Initial torque setting

Current limit setting

0.5–180 seconds

0%–85%

0%–550%

0.5–180 seconds

0%–85%

0%–550%

Soft stop

Pump control option

Overtemperature protection

0–60 seconds

Yes

Yes

0–60 seconds

Yes

Yes

Overload

Overload setting

Trip class setting

Phase loss/unbalance

Jam

Stall

Phase reversal

Yes

30%–100%

5, 10, 20 and 30

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

30%–100%

5, 10, 20 and 30

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Jog

Extended start

LED status indication

LED fault indication

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LCD—Yes

LCD—Yes

Description S801

Soft Starter

S811 Communicating

Soft Starter

Temperature—operating (No derating)

Current rating (50 ºC)

Limited duty cycle (50 ºC)

–25º C to +40 ºC

100%

Fully rated

–30 ºC to +50 ºC

100%

Fully rated

Current rating (60 ºC)

Limited duty cycle (60 ºC)

Temperature—storage

Altitude (meters)

10% reduction

Continuous duty cycle at 90%

–40 ºC to +70 ºC

2000

Consult factory

Consult factory

–50 ºC to +70 ºC

2000

30.5-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description

066

Multi-Motor Operation

The S801/S811 line can be used

to control multiple motors if the

following conditions are met:

■The current rating of the S801/S811

should be equal to or greater than

the total of the individual motor

full load amperes and the S801/S811

overload must be set for the

cumulative full load amperes

of the motors

■Individual motor overcurrent

protection is provided by

other devices

■The motors should not be

mechanically coupled together,

i.e., two motors on same shaft

■NEC and local code requirements

for individual motor protection

and branch short circuit protection

are met

■Motors are closely matched in total

load and size

Frequent Starting/Stopping

The number of starts and stops

allowable depends upon many factors.

The most important ones are:

1. Set level of the starting current limit

2. Start time

3. Run time

4. Off time before next start

The number of starts per hour is based

on the current carrying capacity of

the SCRs. A high start/stop duty may

require the oversizing of a soft starter.

If a high number of multiple starts

occur, the starter may trip due to the

overload protection for the motor or

it may trip on overtemperature of the

soft starter. In this situation, it is advis-

able to wait a period of 10 minutes

before restarting to avoid damage to

the soft starter and motor and allow

the units to cool down. The motor

manufacturer should be consulted

about the effect of a high number

of multiple starts on motor life.

Starting Torque

The reduced voltage applied to the

motor results in reduced inrush

current and a soft start. However,

it reduces the starting torque of the

motor. The relationship is as follows:

EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 1800 RPM, 460 V

NEMA B motor draws six times full

load amperes for starting, and starting

torque is 150% of full load torque.

If the same motor were started with

the S801 at 300% current limit, then

the available torque would be:

1/4 x 150% full load torque =

37.5% full load torque available

Heat Generation

Due to the voltage drop that occurs

across a SCR, there is heat generated

in the unit. For sizing an enclosure

or box size for the soft starters, it is

important to account for this heat

generation.

The S801/S811 lines use a bypass

contactor, so heat generation is mini-

mized. During steady-state conditions,

it generates about the same amount of

heat as an across-the-line starter of the

same size. During start and stopping

ramps it will generate three watts of

heat per ampere.

EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 480 V NEMA B

motor has a full load current of 125

amperes. A typical soft start on this

motor is 300% current limit for 40

seconds. The heat generation during

this time period is:

125 amperes x 300% =

375 watts for 40 seconds

At the end of the ramp, the bypass

contactor closes and total heat genera-

tion is reduced to much lower levels.

NEMA Design C and D Motors,

Wound Rotor Motors

These motors are used due to their

high starting torque characteristics.

When high starting currents and high

starting torques are required, it may be

necessary to order the extended ramp

option and oversize the soft starter to

match the application requirements.

Consult the factory for application con-

siderations.

Torque at reduced current

Torque at full current

----------------------------------------------------------------------

=

Current at reduced voltage2

Current at full voltage

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

3002

600

------------ 90,000

360,000

--------------------- ==

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-5

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

General Description

067

Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Starters

Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.5-4. Non-combination Solid-State

Reduced Voltage

1Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,

CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes

space for a DNA module or MOV.

2Contact Eaton for Box Dimensions not

shown in PG03300001E.

Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.

Table 30.5-5. Combination Solid-State

Reduced Voltage

3Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,

CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes

space for a DNA module or MOV.

4Same as footnote 3, but CPT is not included.

Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a

CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.

Rating SSRV Non-combination

Box No. 1

37 A

66 A

105 A

135 A

180 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

7A

7A

7A

B1

C

240 A

304 A

360 A

420 A

500 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

2

2

2

10

10

650 A

720 A

850 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

10

10

10

1000 A S801/S811 10

Rating SSRV Comb. with

Fuses

Comb. with

HMCP

Box No. 3Box No. 3

37 A

66 A

105 A

135 A

180 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

B1

C

D

D

E

A1 4

A1

B1

C

E

240 A

304 A

360 A

420 A

500 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

E

E

E

E

E

650 A

720 A

850 A

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

1000 A S801/S811 F1E F1E

For enclosure box dimensions,

refer to Page 30.6-3.

30.5-6

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

068

S801 Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Soft Starter

S801 Reduced Voltage Soft Starters

General Description

Eaton’s S801 line of reduced voltage

soft starters is very compact, multi-

functional, easy-to-install and

easy-to-program. Designed to control

acceleration and deceleration of three-

phase motors, the line is available in

current ranges from 12 to 1000 A and

is suitable for mounting in motor

control centers or in enclosed control

(NEMA 1, 4, 4X and 12) applications.

This product line is designed to compete

head-to-head with the high-end soft

starter market, offering improved

performance and dramatically smaller

size versus the competition. By having

the over-load functionality and bypass

contactors built into the unit, it reduces

the amount of wiring required during

installation and offers huge space

savings in the panel or enclosure.

The product is also designed to be

small enough to replace an existing

across-the-line starter (NEMA or IEC)

in the existing enclosure. This allows

customers to upgrade their existing

motor control centers and enclosed

control by replacing the starter they

have today with a soft starter, gaining

the benefits of lower utility charges,

longer component life and less stress

on products and material systems.

This size benefit allows users to save

the expense of replacing the existing

structure or adding a new one to

house a much larger soft starter.

Application Description

The S801 line uses a total of six SCRs

to control the motor (three matched

pairs). The unit has a built-in overload

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.5-6. S801 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System

1Not available on U-Frame.

2U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

that is adjustable from 30% to 100% of

rating and can be set for Trip Class 5,

10, 20 or 30. It also provides additional

protection for jam, stall, phase reversal,

phase loss, overtemperature, under-

voltage and so on. Along with the

overload, the unit has a built-in run

bypass contactor. This device is closed

when the soft starter is up to speed

providing a low impedance bypass for

the SCRs and significantly reducing the

amount of heat that is generated in the

soft starter.

The S801 is designed to work with

three-phase motors in a delta (three-

lead) configuration. The S801 works

with all motors from fractional horse-

power up to motors requiring 1000 A

of steady-state current. The built-in

overload (in ranges from 12 to 1000 A)

and run bypass contactor makes

installation and setup quick and easy.

The overload also offers some

advanced protective functions to give

additional motor protection.

With the pump control option, it is the

number one soft starter available for

pumping applications. The unique soft

stopping control provides a smooth

transition for stopping a motor and

eliminating the “water-hammer”

effect that can damage pipes, valves

and pumps.

Features

■Built-in overload protection:

❑30%–100% adjustment range

❑Trip Class 5, 10, 20 and 30

❑Jam

❑Stall

❑Phase reversal

❑Phase loss/unbalance

❑Shorted SCR detection

❑Overtemperature

■Selectable ramp or current

limit start.

■Kick Start:

❑Adjustable from 0%–85%

initial torque

❑0–2.0 seconds adjustment time

■Ramp Start:

❑Adjustable from 0%–85%

initial torque

❑0.5–180 seconds adjustment time

■Current Limit Start:

❑Adjustable from 0%–550% FLA

❑0.5–180 seconds adjustment time

■Soft Stop:

❑Adjustable from 0%–60 seconds

■Built-in run bypass contact

■24 Vdc control

■IP20 finger protection

■Optional pump control

Standards and Certifications

■IEC 947 compliant

■EN 60947-4-2

■CE marked

■CSA certified

■UL listed

B= Level sensing

D= Inside the delta

L= Extended ramp start

S= Standard soft starter

overload

W= Without CIM (control

interface module)

S 801 N66 N 3 S

S = Soft Starter

801 = Non-combination Soft Starter

Ampacity Rating

N37 = 37 A

N66 = 66 A

R10 = 105 A

R13 = 135 A

T18 = 180 A

T24 = 240 A

T30 = 304 A

U36 = 360 A

U42 = 420 A

U50 = 500 A 2

V36 = 360 A

V42 = 420 A

V50 = 500 A

V65 = 650 A

V72 = 720 A

V85 = 850 A

V10 = 1000 A

N= No options

P= Pump control

V= 690 V option 1

3 = Three-pole device

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-7

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

069

S801 Enclosed Soft Starter

Enclosed S801 Soft Starter

General Description

24 Vdc Control—S801 soft starters

superiority begins with the control

package that features 24 Vdc control

running a digital signal processor, or

DSP, and using a low impedance run

circuit, all of which contribute to the

S801 soft starter’s safety, advanced

functionality and compact size.

Built-in Overload Protection—With

most wye-delta starters, many of the

advanced features of the S801 are

functions that must be added at the

expense of cost and space. The S801

soft starter, for example, has built-in

overload protection (overloads must

be added to wye-delta starters). So,

S801 soft starters are more compact,

easier to wire and less costly than their

wye-delta counterparts.

Reduced Power Consumption—The

S801 soft starter costs less in terms

of power consumption. An S801 soft

starter also reduces line brown-outs

and decreases overall energy usage.

For example, an S801 soft starter

controls peak power demand while

a full-voltage starter can apply

600–800% FLA on startup.

Lower Starting Torque—System cost

savings are significant with an S801

soft starter versus a full voltage starter.

With an S801 soft starter, mechanical

components can have longer life or

be reduced in size because of lower

starting torque values (250–500% FLA

current with SSRV).

Fewer Mechanical Problems—Because

an S801 soft starter reduces stress on

a system by eliminating the jolts and

violent speed variations that full-voltage

starters introduce to a process,

fewer mechanical breakdowns

occur, improving the quality of

the product and process.

Features and Benefits

■Longer Life of System Equipment —

With the impressive list of control

and protective functions, this new

line of products is designed to sig-

nificantly increase the protection

it offers to system equipment (e.g.,

motors, belts, pumps and so on).

The benefit of increased system

equipment protection is longer

life and longer system equipment

uptime

■Reduced Power Draw—Power

control features like Ramp Start,

Current Limit Start and Jog Forward

provide maximum flexibility in

selecting start profiles, minimizing

both mechanical and electrical

stress while maximizing motor

performance

■Improved Safety—S801 soft

starters offer fingerproof deadfront

construction, reducing the chance

of electrical shock. With the use

of 24 Vdc control power, pilot

devices and relays can be

operated more safely

■System Cost Savings—With

improved reliability, longer life of

system equipment, reduced power

draw, space savings and improved

safety, you enjoy the benefit of a

significant improvement in system

uptime and a reduction in system

downtime resulting in overall

system cost saving

■Time Savings—Time savings in

using S801 soft starters are achieved

through a quick and easy setup

procedure, user-friendly operational

design, the longer life of system

equipment and improved safety

■Productivity—Overall, S801 soft

starters significantly improve your

productivity by saving you time and

money. This is demonstrated by

longer product life, longer runs

between breakdowns and the

ease of installation and operation

Standards and Certifications

Enclosed Control

■UL 508

■IEC 947-4-2

■EN 60947.2

■CE marked EMC/LV directives

■CSA–22.2

Schematic Diagram

Figure 30.5-1. Wiring Diagram

01

02

03

L1

L2

L3

L1

IT Soft Start

L2

L3

T1

T2 Motor

T3

T1

T2

T3

L1

Power Supply

480 Vac–24 Vdc

L2 L3

++

–

–

(–)

(Diode)

(+)

–

+

P

MX

Reset

1

224V Inputs

DC Only

Terminal Board

Applying Voltages Other Than

24 Vdc to Terminals P Thru 4

May Cause Serious Damage

to Soft-Start Control Board

3

4

Run

Internal

Auxiliary

Contacts

Fault

1

4

13

14

95

96

96

Customer

Control

Device

2

(+)

98

24 Vdc

or

120 Vac

MX

+–

30.5-8

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

070

Technical Data and Specifications

Base Ratings

Table 30.5-8 below is the base ratings for the S801 soft

starter. The tables included in this catalog are meant to

be a selection table for different applications, but to

match a unit to your exact application, consult with

your local Eaton representative or visit our Web site at

www.eaton.com/electrical.

Table 30.5-7. Standard-Duty Ratings

Table 30.5-8. Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

115 sec. start, 300% inrush, 40 °C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to 290 mm V-Frame, 500 A starter.

2U-Frame 500 A does not have IEC Certification.

Severe-Duty Ratings

Motor applications and customer needs come in many

different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating

tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what

the S801 soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under

these categories, you can use these charts. For other applica-

tions, or when a question arises, contact Eaton Corporation

to assist you in selecting the proper soft starter.

Table 30.5-9. Severe-Duty Ratings

Table 30.5-10. Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

3U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

Starting

Method

Ramp Current %

of FLA

Ramp Time

Seconds

Starts per

Hour

Ambient

Temperature

vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage

vs. Wye-delta

vs. 80% RVAT

vs. 65% RVAT

vs. 50% RVAT

300%

500%

350%

480%

390%

300%

30

10

20

20

20

20.

3

3

3

2

3

4

50°C

50°C

50°C

50°C

50°C

50°C

Frame

Size

Maximum

Current

Three-Phase Motor Catalog

Number

kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)

230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF

N37

66

10

18.5

18.5

30

18.5

37

10

20

10

15

10

20

10

20

25

50

20

40

30

60

30

50

S801N37N3S

S801N66N3S

R105

135

30

40

55

63

59

80

30

40

25

30

40

50

30

40

75

100

60

75

100

125

75

100

S801R10N3S

S801R13N3S

T180

240

304

51

75

90

90

110

160

110

147

185

60

75

100

50

60

75

60

75

100

60

75

100

150

200

250

125

150

200

150

200

300

150

200

250

S801T18N3S

S801T24N3S

S801T30N3S

U 360

420

500

110

129

150

185

220

257

220

257

300

125

150

150

100

125

150

150

175

200

125

150

150

300

350

400

250

300

350

350

450

500

300

350

450

S801U36N3S

S801U42N3S

S801U50N3S 12

V 360

420

500

650

720

850

1000

110

129

150

200

220

257

315

185

220

257

355

400

475

560

220

257

300

425

450

500

600

125

150

150

250

—

—

—

100

125

150

200

—

—

—

150

175

200

250

300

350

400

125

150

150

200

250

300

350

300

350

400

500

600

700

800

250

300

350

450

500

600

700

350

450

500

600

700

900

1000

300

350

450

500

600

700

800

S801V36N3S

S801V42N3S

S801V50N3S

S801V65N3S

S801V72N3S

S801V85N3S

S801V10N3S

Starting

Method

Ramp Current %

of FLA

Ramp Time

Seconds

Starts per

Hour

Ambient

Temperature

vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage

vs. Wye-delta

vs. 80% RVAT

vs. 65% RVAT

vs. 50% RVAT

450%

500%

350%

480%

390%

300%

30

10

65

25

40

60

4

10

3

4

4

4

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

Frame

Size

Maximum

Current

Three-Phase Motor Catalog

Number

kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)

230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF

N22

42

5.5

11

10

18.5

11

22

5

10

5

10

7-1/2

15

5

10

15

30

10

25

20

40

15

30

S801N37N3S

S801N66N3S

R65

80

15

22

30

40

33

45

15

25

15

20

20

30

15

25

50

60

40

50

50

75

50

60

S801R10N3S

S801R13N3S

T115

150

192

33

45

55

59

80

100

63

90

110

30

50

60

30

40

50

40

50

75

30

50

60

75

100

150

75

100

125

100

150

200

100

125

150

S801T18N3S

S801T24N3S

S801T30N3S

U 240

305

365

75

90

110

110

160

185

147

185

220

75

100

125

60

75

100

75

100

150

75

100

125

200

250

300

150

200

250

200

300

350

200

250

300

S801U36N3S

S801U42N3S

S801U50N3S 3

V 240

305

365

420

480

525

600

75

90

110

129

147

160

185

110

160

185

220

257

280

315

147

185

220

257

295

335

375

75

100

125

150

150

150

200

60

75

100

125

150

150

150

75

100

150

150

200

200

250

75

100

125

150

150

150

200

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

150

200

250

300

350

350

450

200

300

350

450

500

500

600

200

250

300

350

450

450

500

S801V36N3S

S801V42N3S

S801V50N3S

S801V65N3S

S801V72N3S

S801V85N3S

S801V10N3S

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-9

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

071

Features

■Able to fit in place of existing

starters

■Smallest unit on the market today

■Very easy to install, wire and program

■Reduces initial torque on motor

and loads

■Able to control the maximum

inrush current

Benefits

■Reduced wear on belts, gears,

chains, clutches, shafts and bearings

■Allows for controlling the inrush

current to the motor and reducing

electrical charges due to peak

energy demand

■Reduced inrush current leads to

more stable power grid and can

lower peak demand charges

■Elimination of water-hammer,

which can reduce installed cost of

pipe hangers and extend existing

system life

■Less shock to product on conveyor

lines and material handling gear

■24 Vdc control enhances personnel

and equipment safety

Table 30.5-11. Technical Data

1U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

Soft Starter

(Partial Catalog Number)

S801

N37

S801

N66

S801

R10

S801

R13

S801

T18

S801

T24

S801

T30

S801

U36

S801

U42

S801

U50 1

S801

V36

S801

V42

S801

V50

S801

V65

S801

V72

S801

V85

S801

V10

Maximum current capacity 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Width

Height

Depth

Weight in lbs (kg)

2.60 (66.1)

7.38 (187.4)

6.63 (168.4)

5.80 (2.6)

4.38 (111.3)

7.92 (201.2)

7.03 (178.6)

10.50 (4.8)

7.65 (194.3)

12.71 (322.8)

6.69 (169.9)

48.00 (21.8)—

with lugs

41.00 (18.6) —

without lugs

7.73 (196.3)

12.72 (323.1)

7.08 (179.9)

48.00 (21.8)—

with lugs

41.00 (18.6) —

without lugs

11.04 (280.4)

16.57 (420.9)

7.69 (195.3)

103.00 (46.0)—with lugs

91.00 (41.4)—without lugs

General Information

Bypass mechanical lifespan

Insulating voltage (Ui)

Ramp time range

Resistance to vibration

Resistance to shock

10 M

660 V

0.5–180 seconds (0.5–360 seconds extended ramp)

3g

15g

Electrical Information

Operating voltage

Operating frequency

Overload setting

Trip c l ass

200–600 V

47–63 Hz

30%–100%

5, 10, 20 and 30

Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)

Number of conductors

Wire sizes

Type of connectors

1

14–2

Box lug

1

14–4/0

Box lug

1 or 2

2/0 to 500 kcmil

Add-on lug kit

— — — 2, 4 or 6

2/0 to 500 kcmil

Add-on lug kit

Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG

Number of conductors (stranded)

Torque requirements in lb-in.

Solid, stranded or flexible

maximum size in mm2

22–14

2 (or one AWG 12)

3.5

3.31

Control Power Requirements

Voltage range (24 V ± 10%)

Steady state current amperes

Inrush current amperes

Ripple

21.6–26.4

1.0

10

1%

— — — 21.6–26.4

1.4

10

1%

Relays (1) Class A and C

Voltage AC—maximum

Voltage DC—maximum

Amperes—maximum

240

120

3

Environment

Temperature—operating

Temperature—storage

Altitude

Humidity

Operating position

Pollution degree (IEC 947-1)

Impulse withstand voltage

(IEC 947-4-1)

–30 ºC to +50 ºC (no derating) consult factory for operation >50 ºC

–50 ºC to +70 ºC

<2000 m—consult factory for operation >2000 m

<95% noncondensing

Any

3

4000 V

30.5-10

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

072

S811 Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Soft Starters

S811 Soft Starter

General Description

The S811 from Eaton offers all the

popular features of the S801, but adds

enhanced functionality with the new

DIM (Digital Interface Module) and

communications capabilities.

The S811 reduced voltage soft starter

is very compact, multi-functional,

easy to install and easy to program.

Designed to control the acceleration

and deceleration of three-phase

motors up to 690 V, the line is available

from 11 A through 1000 A.

The S811 is designed to be a complete

package combining the SCRs, bypass

contactor and overload in one, very

compact unit. The S811 is available

as a component for panel mounting,

in motor control centers or in enclosed

control (NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 7/9

and 12).

Application Description

Designed to control the acceleration

and deceleration of three-phase

motors, the S811 soft starter uses

silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) to

control the voltage to soft start and

soft stop the motor. After the motor is

started, internal run bypass contactors

close, resulting in the motor running

directly across-the-line. The built-in

solid-state overload protects the motor

from overload conditions with sophis-

ticated algorithms that model true

motor heating, resulting in better

motor protection and fewer nuisance

trips. Advanced protective and

diagnostic features reduce downtime.

A voltage ramp start or current limit

start is available. Kick start is available

in either starting mode. The soft stop

option allows for a ramp stop time that

is longer than the coast to stop time.

The pump control option provides a

smooth transition for starting and

stopping a motor and eliminating

the “water-hammer” effect that can

damage pipes, valves and pumps.

The S811 offers an impressive array of

advanced protective features. Not only

are the protective features selectable,

but many offer variable settings allow-

ing the user to fine-tune the starter to

meet specific system requirements.

The S811 has an easy to use Digital

Interface Module (DIM) that allows the

user to configure the device and to

read system parameters. The DIM

includes an LCD display and keypad to

scroll through the various menus. The

DIM allows the user to modify control

parameters, enable or disable protec-

tions, set communication variables,

monitor system parameters such as

line voltages and currents, and access

the fault queue.

Figure 30.5-2. Digital Interface Module (DIM)

The DIM can be removed from the

S811 and remote mounted. Kits are

available to door mount the DIM,

enabling users to safely configure,

commission, monitor and trouble-

shoot the system at the electrical panel

without opening the enclosure door.

The S811 has built-in communications

capabilities that enable the soft starter

to be connected to a variety of

networks, including DeviceNet™,

Ethernet, Modbus®and PROFIBUS.

Multiple control components can be

connected to one Eaton gateway that

concentrates data from the devices

into a single node. Configuration is

simple—a single press of the gateway’s

Auto Configuration button sets the

system up for default operation.

This automatically configures the I/O

assemblies to the system devices.

The data from these devices are then

assembled into a single input and

output messages.

The S811 communication parameters

can be configured with the DIM or

through the network using CH Studio

Component Manager.

Advanced communication configura-

tion settings provide the system

integrator with powerful tools to

facilitate system optimization.

Features and Benefits

■The DIM provides an intuitive,

easy-to-use human interface with

powerful configuration capabilities

to maximize system performance

■Door or device mounted DIM

enables users to safely configure,

commission, monitor and trouble-

shoot the system at the electrical

panel without opening the

enclosure door

■System operating parameters

can be monitored enterprise-wide

through a communications network.

Increase uptime by providing data

for process management and

preventive diagnostics

■Run bypass mode greatly reduces

internal heating created by the

greater power dissipation in

the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly

connects the motor to the line and

improves system efficiency by

reducing internal power losses

■Internal solid-state overload

protection provides accurate cur-

rent measurement and trip settings.

Sophisticated algorithms solve

a series of differential equations

that model true motor heating and

cooling, resulting in superior motor

overload protection while minimizing

nuisance trips. Advanced selectable

protective features safeguard the

motor and system against a variety

of system faults

■Internal run bypass contactors and

overload protection eliminate the

need for additional devices, reducing

enclosure sizes, minimizing installa-

tion and wiring time and reducing

overall assembly size and cost

■Wide range of overload FLA settings

(31–100% of rated current) and a

selectable trip class (5–30) offers

users the flexibility to fine-tune the

starter to match specific application

requirements

ESC

ONLN SS OXFDO1 H STOP

Monitoring

PREV NEXT ENTER

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-11

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

073

■Variable ramp times and torque

control settings provide unlimited

starting configurations, allowing for

maximum application flexibility

■Kick-start feature enables soft

starting of high friction loads

■Soft stop control for applications

where an abrupt stop of the load

is not acceptable

■Pump control option with sophisti-

cated pump algorithms on both

starting and stopping that minimize

the pressure surges that cause

water hammer. The pump control

option will maximize the life of the

pump and piping systems while

minimizing the downtime caused

by system failure

■Six SCRs control all three motor

phases, providing smooth accelera-

tion and deceleration performance

■Soft acceleration and deceleration

reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,

clutches, shafts and bearings

■Reduce the peak inrush current

stress on the power system

■Minimize peak starting torque to

diminish mechanical system wear

and damage

■24 Vdc control module enhances

personnel and equipment safety.

■Removable, lockable control terminal

block reduces maintenance costs.

Also provides the opportunity for

OEMs to reduce assembly and

test costs by using pre-assembled

wire harnesses

Protective Features

All protective features can be

configured, enabled or disabled

with the DIM or through the

communications network.

Motor Overload

The S811 includes electronic overload

protection as standard. The overload

meets applicable requirements for a

motor overload protective device. The

overload protects the motor from over

heat conditions with the use of sophisti-

cated algorithms that model true motor

heating, resulting in superior motor

protection and fewer nuisance trips.

The S811 calculates a thermal memory

value. A 100% value represents the

maximum safe temperature of the

motor. When the thermal memory

value reaches 100%, an overload trip

will occur removing power to the

motor. Upon trip, the S811 stores the

calculated motor heating value and

will not allow a motor re-start until the

motor has sufficiently cooled. This

feature ensures the motor will not be

damaged by repeated overload trip,

reset and re-start cycles.

The thermal memory value can be

monitored through the DIM or the

communications network. The thermal

memory value can be of great use in

determining an impending overload

trip condition. Alarms can be imple-

mented in the process monitoring

system warning of an impending

trip before a trip occurs halting the

process. Costly system downtime

can be avoided.

The trip current is adjusted to match

the specific application requirements

by entering the motor nameplate full

load current rating and trip class. The

FLA adjustment includes a 3 to 1

adjustment range. The overload trip

class is adjustable from class 5

through class 30. The overload is

ambient temperature compensated—

meaning its trip characteristics will

not vary with changes in ambient

temperature. The overload protection

can be enabled, disabled, or disabled

on start.

Short Circuit

The use of a short-circuit protective

device in coordination with the S811

is required in branch motor circuits

by most electrical codes. Short-circuit

coordination ratings with both fuses

and Eaton’s molded case circuit

breakers are available providing

customers with design flexibility. The

S811 has short circuit coordination

ratings as an open component, an

enclosed starter, and in a motor

control center.

Jam

Excessive current and torque up to

locked rotor levels can occur in a jam

condition. The condition can result in

stress and damage to the motor, load,

mechanical system, and the electrical

distribution system. Jam protection

prevents the stress and damage from a

jam during normal run. After the

motor is started, a current greater than

300% FLA setting will cause the starter

to trip on a jam fault.

Stall

Excessive current and torque up to

locked rotor levels can occur in a stall

condition. The condition can lead to an

overload trip and result in stress and

damage to the motor, load, mechanical

system, and the electrical distribution

system. Stall protection prevents

stress and damage to a motor that has

not come up to speed, or stalled after

the soft start time. The S811 will trip to

protect the system in the event that the

motor did not get to the rated speed in

the defined soft start period. A current

greater than 200% FLA at the end of

the soft start period will cause the

starter to trip on a stall fault.

Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended

ramp times and high duty cycle condi-

tions may cause the S811 power pole

conductors to reach a temperature that

exceeds their thermal rating. The S811

is equipped with sensors that monitor

the temperature of the power poles.

Over temperature protection occurs

if the device’s thermal capacity is

exceeded. The soft starter will trip

in over temperature conditions,

preventing device failure.

The device pole temperature value

can be monitored through the DIM or

the communications network. This

feature can be of use in determining

an impending over temperature trip

condition. Alarms can be implemented

in the process monitoring system

warning of an impending trip before a

trip occurs, halting the process. Costly

system shutdown can be avoided.

Phase Loss

Loss of a phase can cause a significant

increase in the current drawn in the

remaining two phases. Phase loss

can lead to motor damage before an

eventual overload trip occurs. Phase

loss is typically an indication of a

failure in the electrical distribution

system. The S811 will detect a phase

loss and trip if any phase current drops

below a preset value. The phase loss

trip level is adjustable from 0% to

100% of the average of the other two

phase levels with an adjustable trip

delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.

Phase Imbalance

Phase current or voltage imbalance

can cause a significant increase in the

current drawn in the remaining two

phases. Phase imbalance can lead to

motor damage before an eventual

overload trip. Phase imbalance is

typically an indication of a failure in

the electrical distribution system or

the motor. The S811 will detect both

current and voltage phase imbalances

and trip if any phase becomes

imbalanced as compared to the

average of the other two phases.

The phase current imbalance trip level

is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the

average of the current in the other two

phases with an adjustable trip delay of

0.1 to 60 seconds.

30.5-12

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

074

The phase voltage imbalance trip level

is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the

average of the voltage in the other two

phases with an adjustable trip delay of

0.1 to 60 seconds.

Reset Mode

The S811 can be set up for automatic

or manual reset on trip. The manual

reset mode requires the operator to

physically press the RESET button

located on the soft starter. The over-

load can be manually reset through

the DIM or through the communica-

tions network. The overload can also

be electrically reset by energizing

a 24 Vdc input on the control

terminal block.

The automatic reset mode allows the

soft starter to be automatically reset as

soon as the trip condition is no longer

present. With the automatic reset

mode, after the fault is no longer pres-

ent, the motor will be restarted as soon

as a valid start signal is present.

Phase Reversal

The S811 can determine if the proper

line phase sequence is present by

default. The device will trip if the line

phase sequence is something other

than A-B-C. The S811 can be config-

ured to operate under reversed

phase conditions (A-C-B).

Shorted SCR Detection

The S811 monitors the operation of the

power poles and will trip under a

shorted SCR condition.

Open SCR Detection

The S811 monitors the operation of the

power poles and will trip under an

open SCR condition.

Low Current

Low current conditions can be a result

of a loss of load or a failure in the

mechanical system. The S811 has low

current protection that will trip if the

average rms current falls below a

preset value. The low current protec-

tion can be programmed as a percent

of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.

Low Voltage

Low voltage conditions can result from

disturbances in the electrical power

distribution system. Low voltage

conditions can cause a malfunction

and damage to electrical equipment.

The S811 has low voltage protection

that will trip if the average rms

voltage falls below a preset value.

The low voltage protection can be

programmed as a percent of nominal

voltage from 1% to 99% with a

trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.

High Voltage

High voltage conditions can result from

disturbances in the electrical power

distribution system. High voltage

conditions can cause malfunctions

or failures of electrical equipment.

The S811 has high voltage protection

that will trip if the average rms voltage

is greater than a preset value. The high

voltage protection can be programmed

as a percent of nominal voltage from

101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.1 to

60 seconds.

Monitoring Capabilities

The S811 has an impressive array of

system monitoring capabilities that

allow users to access real time process

and diagnostic data. This data can be

viewed at the device with the DIM or

through a communications network.

Data over a communications network

can provide valuable insight into the

condition of the equipment and pro-

cesses. Maintenance and production

personnel can monitor critical opera-

tional and maintenance data from a

central control station that can be

located far away from the production

facility. Process data can be monitored

to determine system anomalies that

may indicate a need for preventive

maintenance or an impeding failure.

Adjustments made through the com-

munications network can reduce costs

by minimizing the time traveling to the

location where the motor controls are

located. When faults do occur, real

time fault data can assist maintenance

in troubleshooting and planning repair

resources. Remote reset signals can

be given to tripped devices without

the need for manual intervention by

maintenance personnel.

Average Line Current

Provides the average of the three-

phase rms line currents in amps,

accurate to within 2%. Current data

can be used to indicate a need for

maintenance. Increased currents in

a fixed load application can indicate

a reduction in system efficiencies

and performance, signifying system

maintenance is due.

Average Pole Current

Provides the average of the three-

phase rms pole currents in amps,

accurate to within 2%. The pole

current is the current through the

soft starter. The line and pole current

will be identical in in-line applications,

and will differ in inside-the-delta

applications.

Average line current as a % FLA

Provides the average rms line

current as a percentage of the S811

FLA setting.

Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents

in amps, accurate to within 2%.

Imbalances or changes in the relative

phase current to one another can

indicate anomalies in the motor or

electrical distribution system.

Three-Phase Pole Currents

Provides three rms phase pole

currents in amps, accurate to within

2%. The pole current is the current

through the soft starter. The line and

pole current will be identical in in-line

applications, and will differ in inside-

the-delta applications.

Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms three-

phase line voltages. Imbalances or

changes in the relative phase voltage

to one another can indicate anomalies

in the motor or electrical distribution

system. Voltage can be used to

monitor electrical distribution system

performance. Warnings, alarms and

system actions to low or high voltage

conditions can be implemented.

Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real time calculated

thermal memory value. The S811

calculates thermal memory value. A

100% value represents the maximum

safe temperature of the motor. When

the thermal memory value reaches

100%, an overload trip will occur,

removing power to the motor.

The thermal memory value can be of

great use in determining an impending

overload trip condition. Alarms can be

implemented in the process monitor-

ing system warning of an impending

trip before a trip occurs, halting the

process. Costly system downtime can

be avoided.

DC Control Voltage

Monitors level of the 24 Vdc control

voltage. Fluctuations in control voltage

can cause component malfunction and

failure. System control voltage data

can be used to implement warnings,

alarms and system actions to low or

high voltage conditions.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-13

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

075

Pole Temperature

Increases in pole temperature are

caused by increases in ambient

temperature, start/stop times and

start duty cycles. Changes in pole

temperatures represent a change

in system operating conditions.

Identifying unexpected operating

conditions or changes can prompt

maintenance and aid in process

evaluation activities.

Device Temperature

An increase in device temperature is

a strong indication of an increase in

ambient temperature. High ambient

temperature operation can be identi-

fied with the device temperature data.

Ambient temperature increases can be

due to loss of enclosure cooling fans

or blocked venting. High ambient

temperatures will reduce the life of all

electrical equipment in the enclosure.

Start Count

Start count data can be used to

monitor system output, schedule

preventative maintenance, identify

system anomalies and identify

changes in system operation.

Diagnostics

Fault Queue

Current fault and a fault queue

containing the last nine system

faults can be read through the DIM

or communications network. Fault

identification can minimize trouble-

shooting time and cost. The fault

queue can be remotely accessed

through a communications network

to assist in planning maintenance

resources. Thirty different faults

can be identified by the S811.

Control Status

The S811 provides data that represents

system conditions that can be read

through the DIM or the communica-

tions network. This data identifies the

status of the system and the control

commands the system is requesting

of the S811. This can be used for

advanced troubleshooting and

system integration activities.

Breaker Status

The S811 has provisions to read and

display circuit breaker status. Eaton

communicating cover control or

other communicating protective

device is required to take advantage

of this feature.

User Manual

A comprehensive user manual is avail-

able and can be downloaded free of

charge from www.eaton.com/electri-

cal by performing a document search

for MN03902002E.

Accessories

Surge Suppressors

A surge suppressor can mount on

either the line or load side of the

S811 soft starter. It is designed to

clip the line voltage (or load side

induced voltage).

Surge Suppressor

Surge Suppressor Mounted on

a 200 mm Device

Table 30.5-12. Surge Suppressors

Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.5-13. S811 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System

1U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

2Not available in U-Frame.

Description Catalog

Number

600 V MOV for 65 mm

and 110 mm units

EMS38

600 V MOV for 200 mm and

290 mm units

EMS39

690 V MOV for 200 mm and

290 mm units

EMS41

S 811 T 30 N 3 S

Ampacity Rating

37 = 37 A

66 = 66 A

10 = 105 A

13 = 135 A

18 = 180 A

24 = 240 A

30 = 304 A

36 = 360 A

42 = 420 A

50 = 500 A 1

65 = 650 A

72 = 720 A

85 = 850 A

10 = 1000 A

Frame Size

N= 65 mm

R= 110 mm

T= 200 mm

U= 200 mm

V= 290 mm

811 = Non-combination Soft Starter

N= No options

P= Pump control

V= 690 V option

(Frame T18 through V85) 2

S= Standard soft starter

(configurable for edge

or level control)

D= Inside-the-delta

L= Extended ramp start

W= Without DIM

S = Soft starter

3 = Three-pole device

30.5-14

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

076

Operation

Starting and Stopping Modes

The S811 has a variety of starting and

stopping methods to provide superior

performance in the most demanding

applications. The motor can be started

in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current

Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft

Stop are available within both starting

modes.

Voltage Ramp Start

Provides a voltage ramp to the motor

resulting in a constant torque increase.

The most commonly used form of soft

start, this start mode allows you to

set the initial torque value and the

duration of the ramp to full voltage

conditions. Bypass contactors close

after ramp time.

■Adjustable initial torque 0–85%

of locked rotor torque

■Adjustable ramp time 0.5–180

seconds (can be extended with

factory modification)

Current Limit Start

Limits the maximum current available

to the motor during the start phase.

This mode of soft starting is used

when it becomes necessary to limit the

maximum starting current due to long

start times or to protect the motor. This

start mode allows you to set the maxi-

mum starting current as a percentage

of locked rotor current and the dura-

tion of the current limit. Bypass con-

tactors close after current limit time.

■Maximum current of 0–85% locked

rotor current

■Adjustable ramp time 0.5–180

seconds (can be extended with

factory modification)

Kick Start

Selectable feature in both Voltage

Ramp Start and Current Limit Start

modes. Provides a current and torque

“kick” for 0 to 2.0 seconds. This

provides greater initial current to

develop additional torque to break-

away a high friction load.

■0–85% of locked rotor torque

■0–2.0 seconds duration

Soft Stop

Allows for a controlled stopping of a

load. Used when a stop-time that is

greater than the coast-to-stop time is

desired. Often used with high friction

loads where a sudden stop may cause

system or load damage.

■Stop time = 0–60 seconds

Figure 30.5-3. Starting Characteristics—Ramp Start

Figure 30.5-4. Starting Characteristics—Current Limit Start

Figure 30.5-5. Starting Characteristics—Kick Start

Figure 30.5-6. Starting Characteristics—Soft Stop

Run (FLA)

100%

Locked Rotor Torque

Time (Seconds)

Initial

Torque

Run

Max.

Allowed

100%

FLA

Current

Time (Seconds)

100%

Locked Rotor Torque

Ramp

Time (Seconds)

Kick

Start

Run (FLA)

Ramp

Time (Seconds)

Run

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-15

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

077

Product Selection

Motor applications and customer needs

come in many different varieties. With

the standard and severe duty rating

tables, we have attempted to provide

guidelines on what the S811 soft

starter is capable of. If the application

falls under these categories, you can

use these charts. For other applica-

tions, or when a question arises,

consult with your local Eaton

Representative or call our Technical

Resource Center at (877) ETN-CARE.

Table 30.5-14. Standard-Duty Ratings

Table 30.5-15. Product Selection—Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

1500 A rating does not have IEC Certification.

Table 30.5-16. Severe-Duty Ratings

Starting

Method

Ramp Current

% of FLA

Ramp Time

Seconds

Starts

per Hour

Ambient

Temperature

vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage

vs. Wye-delta

vs. 80% RVAT

vs. 65% RVAT

vs. 50% RVAT

300%

500%

350%

480%

390%

300%

30 sec.

10 sec.

20 sec.

20 sec.

20 sec.

20 sec.

3

3

3

2

3

4

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

Frame

Size

Max.

Current

Three-Phase Motor Catalog

Number

kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)

230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF

N37

66

10

18.5

18.5

30

18.5

37

10

20

10

15

10

20

10

20

25

50

20

40

30

60

30

50

S811N37N3S

S811N66N3S

R105

135

30

40

55

63

59

80

30

40

25

30

40

50

30

40

75

100

60

75

100

125

75

100

S811R10N3S

S811R13N3S

T180

240

304

51

75

90

90

110

160

110

147

185

60

75

100

50

60

75

60

75

100

60

75

100

150

200

250

125

150

200

150

200

300

150

200

250

S811T18N3S

S811T24N3S

S811T30N3S

U 360

420

500

110

120

150

185

220

257

220

257

300

125

150

150

100

125

150

150

175

200

125

150

150

300

350

400

250

300

350

350

450

500

300

350

450

S811U36N3S

S811U42N3S

S811U50N3S 1

V 360

420

500

650

720

850

100 0

110

129

150

200

220

257

315

185

220

257

355

400

475

560

220

257

300

425

450

500

600

125

150

150

250

—

—

—

100

125

150

200

—

—

—

150

175

200

250

300

350

400

125

150

150

200

250

300

350

300

350

400

500

600

700

800

250

300

350

450

500

600

700

350

450

500

600

700

900

100 0

300

350

450

500

600

700

800

S811V36N3S

S811V42N3S

S811V50N3S

S811V65N3S

S811V72N3S

S811V85N3S

S811V10N3S

Starting

Method

Ramp Current

% of FLA

Ramp Time

Seconds

Starts

per Hour

Ambient

Temperature

vs. Soft start

vs. Full voltage

vs. Wye-delta

vs. 80% RVAT

vs. 65% RVAT

vs. 50% RVAT

450%

500%

350%

480%

390%

300%

30 sec.

10 sec.

65 sec.

25 sec.

40 sec.

60 sec.

4

10

3

4

4

4

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

50 °C

30.5-16

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

078

Table 30.5-17. Product Selection—Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Frame

Size

Maximum

Current

Three-Phase Motor Catalog

Number

kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)

230 380–400 440 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF

N22

42

5.5

11

10

18.5

11

22

5

10

5

10

7-1/2

15

5

10

15

30

10

25

20

40

15

30

S811N37N3S

S811N66N3S

R65

80

15

22

30

40

33

45

15

25

15

20

20

30

15

25

50

60

40

50

50

75

50

60

S811R10N3S

S811R13N3S

T115

150

192

33

45

55

59

80

100

63

90

110

30

50

60

30

40

50

40

50

75

30

50

60

75

100

150

75

100

125

100

150

200

100

125

150

S811T18N3S

S811T24N3S

S811T30N3S

U 240

305

75

90

110

160

147

185

75

100

60

75

75

100

75

100

200

250

150

200

200

300

200

250

S811U36N3S

S811U42N3S

V 240

305

365

420

480

525

600

75

90

110

129

147

160

185

110

160

185

220

257

280

315

147

185

220

257

295

335

375

75

100

125

150

150

150

200

60

75

100

125

150

150

150

75

100

150

150

200

200

250

75

100

125

150

150

150

200

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

150

200

250

300

350

350

450

200

300

350

450

500

500

600

200

250

300

350

450

450

500

S811V36N3S

S811V42N3S

S811V50N3S

S811V65N3S

S811V72N3S

S811V85N3S

S811V10N3S

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-17

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

079

Technical Data and Specifications

Table 30.5-18. Specifications—S811 Soft Starter

1U-Frame 500 A unit does not have IEC Certification.

2UR Recognized Product.

Soft Starter

(Partial Catalog Number)

S811

N37

S811

N66

S811

R10

S811

R13

S811

T18

S811

T24

S811

T30

S811

U36

S811

U42

S811

U50

1

S811

V36

S811

V42

S811

V50

S811

V65

S811

V72

S811

V85

S811

V10

2

Maximum current capacity

37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000

FLA range 11–

37

20–

66

32–

105

42–

135

56–

180

75–

240

95–

304

11 2 –

360

131 –

420

156 –

500

112 –

360

131–

420

156–

500

203–

650

225–

720

265–

580

320–

1000

Dimensions

Width in inches (mm) 2.66 (67.6) 4.42 (112.2) 7.67 (194.8) 7.73 (196.3) 11.05 (280.6)

Height in inches (mm) 7.38 (187.4) 7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.9) 12.72 (323.1) 16.57 (420.8)

Depth in inches (mm) 6.48 (164.5) 6.64 (168.7) 6.39 (162.4) 7.08 (179.9) 7.35 (186.6)

Weight in lbs (kg) 5.80 (2.6) 10.50 (4.8) 48.00 (21.8) with lugs

41.00 (18.6) without lugs

48.00 (21.8) with lugs

41.00 (18.6) without lugs

103.00 (46.8) with lugs

91.00 (41.4) without lugs

General Information

Bypass mechanical

lifespan

10 million

Insulating voltage Ui 660 V

Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds (0.5–360 seconds extended ramp)

Resistance to vibration 3g

Resistance to shock 15g

Electrical Information

Operating voltage 200–600 V

Operating frequency 47–63 Hz

Overload setting 30–100%

Trip c lass 5, 10, 20 and 30

Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)

Number of conductors One One One or two

—— —

Two, four or six

Wire sizes 14–2 14–4/0 4 AWG to 500 kcmil

—— —

2/0 to 500 kcmil

Type of connectors Box lug Add-on lug kit

Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG 22–14

Number of conductors

(stranded)

Two

(or one AWG 12)

Torque requirements

in lb-in

3.5

Solid, stranded or flexible

maximum size in mm

2

3.31

Control Power Requirements

Voltage range (24 V ± 10%) 21.6–26.4

Steady state current amps 1.0 1.0 1.0

—— —

1.4

Inrush current amps 10 10 10

—— —

10

Ripple 1%

Relays (1) Class A and C

Voltage AC—maximum 240

Voltage DC—maximum 120

Amperes—maximum 3

Environment

Temperature—operating –30 °C to +50 °C (no derating) consult factory for operation > +50 °C

Temperature—storage –50 °C to +70 °C

Altitude <2000m—consult factory for operation > 2000m

Humidity <95% noncondensing

Operating position Any

Pollution degree IEC 947-1 3

Impulse withstand voltage

IEC 947-4-1

6000 V

30.5-18

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

080

S611 Solid-State Reduced

Voltage Soft Starter

S611 Solid-State Soft Starter

General Description

Eaton revolutionized the reduced

voltage control marketplace with its

advanced feature set and user-friendly

user interface module to enhance

system performance and to reduce

commissioning times. The S611 adds

enhanced functionality with network

communications, metering, monitor-

ing and diagnostics capabilities.

The Eaton line of S611 reduced voltage

soft starters is multi-functional, easy to

install and easy to program. Designed

to control the acceleration and deceler-

ation of three-phase motors up to

600 V, the line is available from 26 to

414 A.

The S611 is designed to be a complete

package, combining the SCRs,

bypass contactor and overload in

one compact unit.

Application Description

Designed to control the acceleration

and deceleration of three-phase

motors, the S611 soft starter uses

silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs)

to control the voltage to soft start and

soft stop the motor. After the motor is

started, internal run bypass contactors

close, resulting in the motor running

directly across-the-line. The built-in

solid-state overload protects the

motor from overload conditions with

sophisticated algorithms that model

true motor heating, resulting in better

motor protection and fewer nuisance

trips. Advanced protective and

diagnostic features reduce downtime.

A voltage ramp start or current limit

start is available. Kick start is available

in either starting mode. The soft stop

option allows for a ramp stop time that

is longer than the coast to stop time.

The pump control option provides

a smooth transition for starting and

stopping a motor and for eliminating

the “water-hammer” effect that can

damage pipes, valves and pumps.

The S611 offers an impressive array of

advanced protective features. Not only

are the protective features selectable,

but many offer variable settings allow-

ing the user to fine-tune the starter to

meet specific system requirements.

The S611 has an easy-to-use user

interface module (UI) that allows the

user to configure the device and to read

system parameters. The UI includes

an LED display and a keypad to scroll

through the various parameters. The

UI allows the user to modify control

parameters, enable or disable protec-

tions, set communication variables,

monitor system parameters such as

line voltages and currents, and access

the fault queue.

Figure 30.5-7. User Interface

The UI can be removed from the

S611 and be remote mounted. Kits

are available to door mount the UI,

enabling users to safely configure,

commission, monitor and trouble-

shoot the system at the electrical panel

without opening the enclosure door.

This will help eliminate the possibility

of an arc flash incident.

Communications

The S611 has built-in communication

capabilities through two communica-

tions ports to connect the soft starter

to a variety of networks, including

Modbus (native), DeviceNet™ and

PROFIBUS.

The S611 communication parameters

can be configured with the UI.

Advanced communication configura-

tion settings provide the system

integrator with powerful tools to

facilitate system optimization.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-19

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

081

Figure 30.5-8. Control Wiring Diagram

Table 30.5-19. Network Communications Reference

Features and Benefits

■The UI (user interface module)

provides an intuitive, easy-to-use

human interface with powerful

configuration capabilities to

maximize system performance

■Door or device mounted UI enables

users to safely configure, commis-

sion, monitor and troubleshoot

the system at the electrical panel

without opening the enclosure

door, eliminating the possibility

of an arc flash incident

■System operating parameters

can be monitored enterprise-wide

through a communications network.

Increase uptime by providing data

for process management and

preventive diagnostics

■Run Bypass mode greatly reduces

internal heating created by the

greater power dissipation in the

SCRs. Bypass contactor directly

connects the motor to the line and

improves system efficiency by

reducing internal power losses

■Internal solid-state overload

protection provides accurate

current measurement and trip

settings. Sophisticated algorithms

solve a series of differential

equations that model true motor

heating and cooling, resulting in

superior motor overload protection

while minimizing nuisance trips.

Advanced selectable protective

features safeguard the motor

and system against a variety of

system faults

Description Style

Number

Catalog

Number

Modbus communication adapter without I/O

Modbus communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O

Modbus communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O

3-2372-001A

3-2372-003B

3-2372-004B

C441M

C441N

C441P

DeviceNet communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O

DeviceNet communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O

PROFIBUS communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O

PROFIBUS communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O

3-2372-001B

3-2372-002B

3-2398-001B

3-2398-002B

C441K

C441L

C441S

C441Q

■Internal run bypass contactors

and overload protection eliminate

the need for additional devices,

reducing enclosure sizes, minimiz-

ing installation and wiring time,

and reducing overall assembly

size and cost

■Wide range of overload FLA settings

(50–100% of rated frame current)

and a selectable trip class (5–30)

offers users the flexibility to fine-

tune the starter to match specific

application requirements

■Variable ramp times and torque

control settings provide unlimited

starting configurations, allowing for

maximum application flexibility

■Kick-start feature enables soft

starting of high friction loads

■Soft stop control for applications

where an abrupt stop of the load

is not acceptable

■Pump control option with sophisti-

cated pump algorithms on both

starting and stopping that minimize

the pressure surges that cause

water hammer. The pump control

option will maximize the life of the

pump and piping systems while

minimizing the downtime caused

by system failure

■Six SCRs control all three motor

phases, providing smooth accelera-

tion and deceleration performance

■Soft acceleration and deceleration

reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,

clutches, shafts and bearings

■Reduce the peak inrush current’s

stress on the power system

■Minimize peak starting torque to

diminish mechanical system wear

and damage

■120 Vac control voltage enhances

ease of connections

Protective Features

All protective features can be

configured, enabled or disabled

with the UI or through the

communications network.

30.5-20

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

082

Motor Overload

The S611 includes electronic overload

protection as standard. The overload

meets applicable requirements for a

motor overload protective device.

The overload protects the motor from

overheat conditions with the use of

sophisticated algorithms that model

true motor heating, resulting in

superior motor protection and fewer

nuisance trips.

The S611 calculates a thermal memory

value. A 100% value represents the

maximum safe temperature of the

motor. When the thermal memory

value reaches 100%, an overload trip

will occur removing power to the

motor. Upon trip, the S611 stores the

calculated motor heating value and

will not allow a motor re-start until

the motor has sufficiently cooled. This

feature ensures the motor will not be

damaged by repeated overload trip,

reset and re-start cycles.

The thermal memory value can be

monitored through the UI or the

communications network. The thermal

memory value can be of great use in

determining an impending overload

trip condition. Alarms can be imple-

mented in the process monitoring

system warning of an impending

trip before a trip occurs halting the

process. Costly system downtime

can be avoided.

The trip current is adjusted to match

the specific application requirements

by entering the motor nameplate full

load current rating and trip class. The

FLA adjustment includes a 2 to 1

adjustment range. The overload trip

class is adjustable from class 5

through class 30. The overload is

ambient temperature compensated—

meaning its trip characteristics will not

vary with changes in ambient tempera-

ture. The overload protection can be

enabled, disabled, or disabled on start.

Short Circuit

The use of a short-circuit protective

device in coordination with the S611

is required in branch motor circuits

by most electrical codes. Short-circuit

coordination ratings with both fuses

and Eaton molded-case circuit breakers

are available providing customers with

design flexibility. The S611 has short-

circuit coordination ratings as an open

component, an enclosed starter, and in

a motor control center.

Jam

Excessive current and torque up to

locked rotor levels can occur in a jam

condition. The condition can result in

stress and damage to the motor, load,

mechanical system and the electrical

distribution system. Jam protection

prevents the stress and damage from a

jam during normal run. After the

motor is started, a current greater than

300% FLA setting will cause the starter

to trip on a jam fault.

Stall

Excessive current and torque up to

locked rotor levels can occur in a stall

condition. The condition can lead to

an overload trip and can result in

stress and damage to the motor, load,

mechanical system and the electrical

distribution system. Stall protection

prevents stress and damage to a

motor that has not come up to speed,

or stalled after the soft start time. The

S611 will trip to protect the system in

the event that the motor did not get

to the rated speed in the defined soft

start period. A current greater than

200% FLA at the end of the soft start

period will cause the starter to trip on a

stall fault.

Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended

ramp times and high duty cycle condi-

tions may cause the S611 power pole

conductors to reach a temperature that

exceeds their thermal rating. The S611

is equipped with sensors that monitor

the temperature of the power poles.

Overtemperature protection occurs

if the device’s thermal capacity is

exceeded. The soft starter will trip

in overtemperature conditions,

preventing device failure.

The device pole temperature value

can be monitored through the UI or

the communications network. This

feature can be of use in determining

an impending overtemperature trip

condition. Alarms can be implemented

in the process monitoring system

warning of an impending trip before a

trip occurs, halting the process. Costly

system shutdown can be avoided.

Phase Loss

Loss of a phase can cause a significant

increase in the current drawn in the

remaining two phases. Phase loss

can lead to motor damage before an

eventual overload trip occurs. Phase

loss is typically an indication of a

failure in the electrical distribution

system. The S611 will detect a phase

loss and trip if any phase current drops

below a preset value. The phase loss

trip level is adjustable from 0% to

100% of the average of the other two

phase levels with an adjustable trip

delay of 0.1–60 seconds.

Phase Imbalance

Phase current or voltage imbalance

can cause a significant increase in the

current drawn in the remaining two

phases. Phase imbalance can lead to

motor damage before an eventual

overload trip. Phase imbalance is

typically an indication of a failure in

the electrical distribution system or

the motor. The S611 will detect both

current and voltage phase imbalances

and trip if any phase becomes

imbalanced as compared to the

average of the other two phases.

The phase current imbalance trip level

is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the

average of the current in the other two

phases with an adjustable trip delay of

0.1–60 seconds.

The phase voltage imbalance trip level

is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the

average of the voltage in the other two

phases with an adjustable trip delay of

0.1–60 seconds.

Reset Mode

The S611 can be set up for automatic

or manual reset on trip. The manual

reset mode requires the operator to

physically press the RESET button

located on the soft starter. The

overload can be manually reset

through the UI or through the

communications network.

The automatic reset mode allows the

soft starter to be automatically reset as

soon as the trip condition is no longer

present. With the automatic reset

mode, after the fault is no longer

present, the motor will be restarted as

soon as a valid start signal is present.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-21

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

083

Phase Reversal

The S611 can determine if the proper

line phase sequence is present by

default. The device will trip if the line

phase sequence is something other

than A-B-C. The S611 can be config-

ured to operate under reversed phase

conditions (A-C-B).

Shorted SCR Detection

The S611 monitors the operation of the

power poles and will trip under a

shorted SCR condition.

Open SCR Detection

The S611 monitors the operation of the

power poles and will trip under an

open SCR condition.

Low Current

Low current conditions can be a result

of a loss of load or a failure in the

mechanical system. The S611 has low

current protection that will trip if the

average rms current falls below a

preset value. The low current protec-

tion can be programmed as a percent

of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.

Low Voltage

Low voltage conditions can result from

disturbances in the electrical power

distribution system. Low voltage

conditions can cause a malfunction

and damage to electrical equipment.

The S611 has low voltage protection

that will trip if the average rms

voltage falls below a preset value.

The low voltage protection can be

programmed as a percent of nominal

voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip

delay of 0.1–60 seconds.

High Voltage

High voltage conditions can result

from disturbances in the electrical

power distribution system. High

voltage conditions can cause

malfunctions or failures of electrical

equipment. The S611 has high voltage

protection that will trip if the average

rms voltage is greater than a preset

value. The high voltage protection

can be programmed as a percent of

nominal voltage from 101% to 120%

with a trip delay of 0.1–60 seconds.

Monitoring Capabilities

The S611 has an impressive array of

system monitoring capabilities that

allow users to access real-time process

and diagnostic data. This data can be

viewed at the device with the UI or

through a communications network.

Data over a communications network

can provide valuable insight into the

condition of the equipment and

processes. Maintenance and produc-

tion personnel can monitor critical

operational and maintenance data from

a central control station that can be

located far away from the production

facility. Process data can be monitored

to determine system anomalies that

may indicate a need for preventive

maintenance or an impeding failure.

Adjustments made through the

communications network can reduce

costs by minimizing the time traveling

to the location where the motor controls

are located. When faults do occur, real-

time fault data can assist maintenance

in troubleshooting and planning repair

resources. Remote reset signals can be

given to tripped devices without the

need for manual intervention by

maintenance personnel.

Average Line Current

Provides the average of the three

phase rms line currents in amperes,

accurate to within 2%. Current data

can be used to indicate a need for

maintenance. Increased currents in a

fixed load application can indicate a

reduction in system efficiencies and

performance, signifying system

maintenance is due.

Average Pole Current

Provides the average of the three-phase

rms pole currents in amperes, accurate

to within 2%. The pole current is the

current through the soft starter. The line

and pole current will be identical in

in-line applications, and will differ in

inside-the-delta applications.

Average Line Current as a % FLA

Provides the average rms line current as

a percentage of the S611 FLA setting.

Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents

in amperes, accurate to within 2%.

Imbalances or changes in the relative

phase current to one another can

indicate anomalies in the motor or

the electrical distribution system.

Three-Phase Pole Currents

Provides three rms phase pole currents

in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The

pole current is the current through the

soft starter. The line and pole current

will be identical in in-line applications.

Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms three-

phase line voltages. Imbalances or

changes in the relative phase voltage

to one another can indicate anomalies

in the motor or the electrical distribu-

tion system. Voltage can be used to

monitor electrical distribution

system performance.

Warnings, alarms and system actions

to low or high voltage conditions can

be implemented.

Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real-time calculated

thermal memory value. The S611

calculates thermal memory value. A

100% value represents the maximum

safe temperature of the motor. When

the thermal memory value reaches

100%, an overload trip will occur,

removing power to the motor.

The thermal memory value can be of

great use in determining an impending

overload trip condition. Alarms can be

implemented in the process monitor-

ing system warning of an impending

trip before a trip occurs, halting the

process. Costly system downtime can

be avoided.

Pole Temperature

Increases in pole temperature are

caused by increases in ambient

temperature, start/stop times and

start duty cycles. Changes in pole

temperatures represent a change

in system operating conditions.

Identifying unexpected operating

conditions or changes can prompt

maintenance and aid in process

evaluation activities.

Power Monitoring

S611 does monitor the power and it

can be displayed on the UI.

30.5-22

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

084

Diagnostics

Fault Queue

Current fault and a fault queue

containing the last nine system

faults can be read through the UI

or the communications network. Fault

identification can minimize trouble-

shooting time and cost, and prevent

arc flash incidents. The fault queue

can be remotely accessed through

a communications network to assist

in planning maintenance resources.

30 different faults can be identified by

the S611.

Control Status

The S611 provides data that represents

system conditions that can be read

through the UI or the communications

network. This data identifies the

status of the system and the control

commands the system is requesting

of the S611. This can be used for

advanced troubleshooting and

system integration activities.

Operation

Starting and Stopping Modes

The S611 has a variety of starting and

stopping methods to provide superior

performance in the most demanding

applications. The motor can be started

in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current

Limit Start mode. Kick Start and

Soft Stop are available within both

starting modes.

Voltage Ramp Start

Provides a voltage ramp to the motor

resulting in a constant torque increase.

The most commonly used form of soft

start, this start mode allows you to

set the initial torque value and the

duration of the ramp to full voltage

conditions. Bypass contactors close

after ramp time.

■Adjustable initial torque 0–85% of

locked rotor torque

■Adjustable ramp time 0.5–

180 seconds (can be extended

with factory modification)

Current Limit Start

Limits the maximum current available

to the motor during the start phase.

This mode of soft starting is used

when it becomes necessary to limit the

maximum starting current due to long

start times or to protect the motor.

This start mode allows you to set

the maximum starting current as

a percentage of locked rotor current

and the duration of the current limit.

Bypass contactors close after current

limit time.

■Maximum current of 0–85% locked

rotor current

■Adjustable ramp time 0.5–

180 seconds (can be extended

with factory modification)

Kick Start

Selectable feature in both Voltage

Ramp Start and Current Limit Start

modes. Provides a current and torque

“kick” for 0–2.0 seconds. This

provides greater initial current to

develop additional torque to break-

away a high friction load.

■0–85% of locked rotor torque

■0–2.0 seconds duration

Soft Stop

Allows for a controlled stopping of a

load. Used when a stop-time that is

greater than the coast-to-stop time is

desired. Often used with high friction

loads where a sudden stop may cause

system or load damage.

■Stop time = 0–60 seconds

Figure 30.5-9. Ramp Start

Figure 30.5-10. Current Limit Start

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-23

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

085

Figure 30.5-11. Kick Start Graphic

Figure 30.5-12. Stop Ramp Graphic

Edge and Level Sensing Control

Edge or level sensing is selected

with the Start Control parameter in

the Advanced Configuration Menu.

Factory default is level sensing.

Edge Sensing

Edge sensing requires 120 Vac power

be momentarily applied to the Start

terminal (with the Permissive terminal

120 Vac) to initiate a start under all

conditions. After a stop or fault occurs,

the 120 Vac must be removed, then

reapplied to pin 1 before another start

can occur. This control configuration

should be used when restarting of

the motor after a fault or stop must

be supervised manually or as a part

of a control scheme. The cycling of

120 Vac power to the Permissive

terminal before starting is required

regardless of the position of the auto

reset parameter.

Level Sensing

Level sensing will enable a motor to

restart after a fault is cleared without

cycling 120 Vac to the Permissive

terminal as long as:

■Permissive terminal is supplied

with 120 Vac

■The auto reset parameter is set

to enabled

■All faults have cleared or have

been reset

This control configuration should be

used where it is desirable to restart a

motor after a fault without additional

manual or automatic control. An

example of this condition would be

on a remote pumping station where it

is desirable to automatically restart a

pump after a power outage without

operator intervention.

If the auto reset feature is used,

CAUTION must be exercised to

ensure that any restart occurs in

a safe manner.

30.5-24

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

086

Product Selection

Motor applications and customer

needs come in many different

varieties. The standard and severe-

duty rating tables provide guidelines

on what the soft starter is capable of.

If the application falls under these

categories, use these charts. For other

applications, or when a question

arises, consult a local Eaton

Representative or call the Eaton

Technical Resource Center.

Table 30.5-20. S611 Horsepower Ratings—300% FLA at 15 Seconds at 50°C

Options

Pump Control

For pump control option, change the 9th digit in the Catalog Number to P.

Table 30.5-21. S611 Horsepower Ratings—Pump Control Option

Standards and Certifications

■IEC 60947-4-2

■UL listed

■CSA certified (3211 06)

Maximum

Current

Amperes

60 Hz Catalog

Number

200 V 230 V 460 V 575–600 V

1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV

52

65

77

15

20

20

10

15

20

15

20

25

15

20

20

40

50

60

30

40

50

50

60

75

40

50

60

S611A052N3S

S611A065N3S

S611A077N3S

99

125

156

30

40

50

25

30

40

30

40

60

30

40

50

75

100

125

60

75

100

100

125

150

75

100

125

S611B099N3S

S611B125N3S

S611C156N3S

180

242

302

60

75

100

50

60

75

60

75

100

60

75

100

150

200

250

125

150

200

150

250

350

150

200

250

S611C180N3S

S611D242N3S

S611E302N3S

361

414

125

150

100

125

150

N/A

125

150

300

350

250

250

350

450

300

350

S611E361N3S

S611F414N3S

Maximum

Current

Amperes

60 Hz Catalog

Number

200 V 230 460 V 575–600 V

1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV

52

65

77

15

20

20

10

15

20

15

20

25

15

20

20

40

50

60

30

40

50

50

60

75

40

50

60

S611A052P3S

S611A065P3S

S611A077P3S

99

125

156

30

40

50

25

30

40

30

40

60

30

40

50

75

100

125

60

75

100

100

125

150

75

100

125

S611B099P3S

S611B125P3S

S611C156P3S

180

242

302

60

75

100

50

60

75

60

75

100

60

75

100

150

200

250

125

150

200

150

250

350

150

200

250

S611C180P3S

S611D242P3S

S611E302P3S

361

414

125

150

100

125

150

N/A

125

150

300

350

250

250

350

450

300

350

S611E361P3S

S611F414P3S

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-25

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Solid-State Starters

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

087

Technical Data and Specifications

Table 30.5-22. Specifications—S611 Solid-State Soft Starter

Soft Starter

(Partial Catalog Number)

S611A052 S611A065 S611A072 S611B099 S611B125 S611C156 S611C180 S611D242 S611E302 S611E361 S611F414

Maximum

current capacity

52 65 77 99 125 156 180 242 302 361 414

FLA range 26–52 32.5–65 38.5–77 48–99 62.5–125 78–156 90–180 120–242 151–302 180.5–361 207–414

Dimensions—Inches (mm)

Width 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 17.56 (446.0) 17.56 (446.0)

Height 19.45 (494.0) 19.45 (494.0) 20.83 (529.1) 20.83 (529.1) 31.15 (791.2) 31.15 (791.2)

Depth 7.46 (189.5) 7.46 (189.5) 8.37 (212.6) 8.37 (212.6) 9.54 (242.3) 9.54 (242.3)

Weight in lbs (kg) 24 (11) 24 (11) 33 (15) 38 (15) 86 (39) 102 (46)

General Information

Bypass mechanical

lifespan

10 million

Insulating voltage 660 V

Ramp time range 0.5–180 seconds

Resistance to vibration 1g

Resistance to shock Meets ITSA standards

Electrical Information

Operating voltage 130–600 V

Operating frequency 47–63 Hz

Overload setting (frame) 50–100% FLA

Trip c las s 5, 10, 20 and 30

Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)

Number of conductors One One One One One One One One

Two Two Two

Wire sizes 14–2/0 14–2/0 14–2/0 14–2/0 2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

2–600

kcmil

Type of connectors Lug

Control Wiring

Wire sizes in AWG 22–12

Number of conductors Two (or one 12–14 AWG)

Torque requirements 3.5 lb-in

Maximum size 12 AWG

Control Power Requirements

Voltage range

(24 V ±10%)

108–132

Steady-state

current amperes

0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.75 0.75 0.75 —

Inrush current amperes 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 —

Ripple 1%

Relays (1) Class A and C

Voltage AC—maximum 120

Voltage DC—maximum 24

Amperes—maximum 3

Environment

Temperature—operating –20 °C to +50 °C

Temperature—storage –40 °C to +85 °C

Altitude <2000 m, derate 0.5% per 100 m >2000 m

Humidity <95% noncondensing

Operating position Vertical, line side up

Pollution degree

IEC 947-1

3

Impulse withstand

voltage IEC 947-4-1

6000V

30.5-26

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

088

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

General Description

Eaton’s DS6 line of reduced voltage

solid-state soft start controllers is very

compact, multi-functional, easy to install

and easy to commission. Designed to

control the acceleration and deceleration

of three-phase motors, the device is

available for current ranges from

40 to 180 A.

Application Description

With its small size, it can easily fit in

place of existing soft starters, wye-delta

starters, or across-the-line NEMA

and IEC starters. This feature allows

easy upgrades to existing systems.

The product is designed to be wired

in the three-phase line feeding the

three motor input leads as is done

for normal across-the-line starting. The

starter uses silicon controlled

rectifiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage

to the motor, providing smooth

acceleration and deceleration of the

load. After the motor is started, the

internal run bypass contactor closes,

resulting in the motor running directly

across-the-line. Internal run bypass

significantly reduces the heat generated

as compared to non-bypass starters.

The soft stop option allows for a ramp

stop time that may be longer than

the coast-to-stop time. An external

over-load protection is needed.

Operation

Voltage Ramp Start

This start method provides a voltage

ramp to the motor, resulting in a

constant torque increase. This most

commonly used form of soft start

mode allows you to set the initial

voltage value and the duration of the

ramp to full voltage conditions.

Bypass contactor(s) close after ramp

time has elapsed.

■Adjustable initial voltage 30–92%

of full voltage

■Adjustable ramp time 1–30 seconds

Soft Stop

Allows for a controlled stopping of

load. Used when a stop-time that is

greater than the coast-to-stop time is

desired. Often used with high friction

loads where a sudden stop may cause

system or product damage. Setting the

soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off

this feature.

■Soft stop time = 0–30 seconds

Figure 30.5-13. Start Ramp

Figure 30.5-14. Stop Ramp

Bypass

Speed

Time (Seconds)

Start Run

100%

Speed

Time (Seconds)

Run Soft Stop

100%

1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)

2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)

3 = Soft Stop Time

1

2

3

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-27

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

089

Features and Benefits

■Run Bypass mode greatly reduces

internal heating created by the

power dissipation across the SCRs.

The bypass contactor directly

connects the motor to the line

and improves system efficiency

by reducing internal power losses

■Less heat minimizes enclosure size

and cooling requirements, and

maximizes the life of all devices

in the enclosure

■LED displays device status and

provides fault indication

■Variable ramp times and voltage

control (torque control) settings

provide unlimited starting configu-

rations, allowing for maximum

application flexibility

■Soft stop control suits applications

where an abrupt stop of the load

is not acceptable. Soft acceleration

and deceleration reduces wear on

belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts

and bearings

■Minimizes the peak inrush current’s

stress on the power system

■Manages peak starting torque to

diminish mechanical system wear

and damage

■24 Vdc control module enhances

personnel and equipment safety

Protective Features

■There are two auxiliary relays—

❑First relay is a TOR relay that

closes when the TOR is achieved

(internal bypass relays close)

❑The second relay is a RUN relay

that closes when the RUN signal

is initiated and opens when RUN

signal is removed. It remains

closed during stop ramp time,

if set to a value greater than 0.

The RUN relay will also open

if a fault occurs

■Mains connection—The mains

connection is monitored for an

open condition and/or undervoltage

■Motor connection—The motor

connection is monitored for an

open condition

■SCR faults—SCR performance is

monitored during the ramp cycle

for proper operation

■Heat sink over/under temperature—

High ambient temperatures,

extended ramp times and high duty

cycle conditions may cause the DS6

to exceed its thermal rating. When

temperature goes under –5 °C,

unit will trip as well. The DS6 is

equipped with sensors that monitor

the temperature of the device. The

soft starter will trip in over/under

temperature conditions, preventing

device failure

■Bypass relay—The DS6 can detect if

the bypass relay fails to close after

the ramp start or opens while the

motor is running. The DS6 will

trip on a bypass dropout fault if

either of these conditions occur.

The device does not start when

bypass relay is closed and start

signal is applied

■24 Vdc low voltage—If the control

voltage falls below 20 Vdc at any

time during operation, the unit

will fault

Standards and Certifications

■IEC 60947-4-2

■EN 60947-4-2

■UL listed (E251034)

■CSA certified

■CE marked

■C-Tick

Additional Information

■Instruction Leaflet IL03901001E

30.5-28

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

090

Product Selection

DS6 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.

Table 30.5-23. DS6 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—

10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C

1Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.

2XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.

3XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.

4ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.

Table 30.5-24. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C

5Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.

6XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.

7ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (hp) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size 1

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size 1

Recommended

XTOB Overload

Recommended

C440 Overload

Catalog

Number

200 V 230 V 460 V

40

52

65

10

15

20

10

20

25

30

40

50

HFD3150L

HFD3200L

HJD3250

150 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

XTOB040DC1 2

XTOB057DC1 2

XTOB065DC1 2

C440A1A045SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

DS6-34DSX041N0-N

DS6-34DSX055N0-N

DS6-34DSX068N0-N

77

96

124

25

30

40

30

30

50

60

75

100

HKD3300

HKD3350

HKD3400

300 A Class RK5

350 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB125GC1S

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440A1A005SAX 4

DS6-34DSX081N0-N

DS6-34DSX099N0-N

DS6-34DSX134N0-N

156

180

50

60

60

75

125

150

HLD3450

HLD3500

500 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB160LC1 3

XTOB220LC1 3

C440A1A005SAX 4

C440A1A005SAX 4

DS6-34DSX161N0-N

DS6-34DSX196N0-N

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (hp) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size 5

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size 5

Recommended

XTOB Overload

Recommended

C440 Overload

Catalog

Number

200 V 230 V 460 V

27

34

40

7. 5

10

15

10

10

15

20

30

30

HFD3150L

HFD3200L

HJD3250

150 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

XTOB040DC1

XTOB040DC1

XTOB057DC1 6

C440A1A045SAX

C440A1A045SAX

C440A1A045SAX

DS6-34DSX041NO-N

DS6-34DSX055NO-N

DS6-34DSX068NO-N

52

65

80

15

20

30

20

25

30

40

50

75

HKD3300

HKD3350

HKD3350

300 A Class RK5

350 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB057DC1 6

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB100GC1S

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

DS6-34DSX081NO-N

DS6-34DSX099NO-N

DS6-34DSX134NO-N

96

124

30

40

40

50

75

100

HLD3450

HLD3500

500 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB150GC1S

C440B1A100SAX

C440A1A005SAX 7

DS6-34DSX161NO-N

DS6-34DSX196NO-N

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-29

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

091

DS6 Soft Start kW Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.

Table 30.5-25. DS6 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—

10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C

1Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.

2XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.

3XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.

4ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.

Table 30.5-26. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C

5Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.

6XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.

7XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.

8ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.

Considerations

1. Either XTOB, C306 or C440 series

or equivalent overload protection

devices may be selected.

2. Contactor is optional for normal

applications. It is recommended

for mains isolation.

Power Supply

Eaton’s PSG and ELC power supplies

are recommended as a compact and

low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The

light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices

have a wide input voltage range,

and robust screw terminals make

these power supplies easy to install

and use. These power supplies are

available in 1A and 2A models.

Table 30.5-27. Power Supply Selection

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (kW) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size 1

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size 1

Recommended

XTOB Overload

Recommended

C440 Overload

Catalog

Number

230 V 400 V

41

55

68

11

15

15

22

30

37

HFD3150L

HFD3200L

HJD3250

150 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

XTOB057DC1 2

XTOB057DC1 2

XTOB070GC1 2

C440A1A045SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

DS6-34DSX041N0-N

DS6-34DSX055N0-N

DS6-34DSX068N0-N

81

99

134

22

30

30

45

55

75

HKD3300

HKD3350

HKD3400

300 A Class RK5

350 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB150GC1S

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440A1A005SAX 4

DS6-34DSX081N0-N

DS6-34DSX099N0-N

DS6-34DSX134N0-N

160

196

45

55

90

110

HLD3450

HLD3500

500 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB160LC1 3

XTOB220LC1 3

C440A1A005SAX 4

C440A1A005SAX 4

DS6-34DSX161N0-N

DS6-34DSX196N0-N

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (kW) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size 5

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size 5

Recommended

XTOB Overload

Recommended

C440 Overload

Catalog

Number

230 V 400 V

28.8

37.5

46

7. 5

11

11

11

18.5

22

HFD3150L

HFD3200L

HJD3250

150 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

200 A Class RK5

XTOB040DC1

XTOB040DC1

XTOB057DC1 6

C440A1A045SAX

C440A1A045SAX

C440B1A100SAX

DS6-34DSX041NO-N

DS6-34DSX055NO-N

DS6-34DSX068NO-N

56

68

90

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

HKD3300

HKD3350

HKD3350

300 A Class RK5

350 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB065DC1 6

XTOB100GC1S

XTOB100GC1S

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

C440B1A100SAX

DS6-34DSX081NO-N

DS6-34DSX099NO-N

DS6-34DSX134NO-N

106

134

30

37

55

75

HLD3450

HLD3500

500 A Class RK5

500 A Class RK5

XTOB160LC1 7

XTOB160LC1 7

C440A1A005SAX 8

C440A1A005SAX 8

DS6-34DSX161NO-N

DS6-34DSX196NO-N

Description Catalog

Number

85–264 V input and 24 V output

380–480 V input and 24 V output

ELC-PS01

PSS25F

100–240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output

380–480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output

PSG60E

PSG60F

30.5-30

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

092

Technical Data and Specifications

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers

Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N

General

Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2

Certifications UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA

Ambient temperature

(operation)

°C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

Ambient temperature

(storage)

°C –25 °C to +5 5 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C

Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 100 0m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical

Protection degree — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Protection against contact — Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Overvoltage category/

pollution degree

— II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2

Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms

Vibration resistance

according to EN 60721-3-2

— 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2

Dimensions in inches (mm)

(W x H x D)

— 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)

3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)

3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)

3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)

Weight in lbs (kg) — 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8)

Main Circuit

Rated operation voltage V 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac

Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated impulse

withstand voltage

Uimp 1.2/

50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Rated operation current Ie40 52 65 77

Motor Power Ratings

200 V hp 10 15 20 25

230 V hp 10 20 25 30

460 V hp 30 40 50 60

230 V kW 11 15 15 22

400 V kW 22 30 37 45

Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2

— 40 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 52 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 65 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 77 A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-31

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

093

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N

Wire Specifications

Power terminals (box terminals)

Single conductor

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

12–2/0

53–80

12–2/0

53–80

12–2/0

53–80

12–2/0

53–80

Control signals

Single conductor

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

Power Section

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 1.2 /

50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Control Commands

Supply voltage control board

Nominal voltage

Nominal current ramp, TOR

Current peak (closing shorting contactors)

Us

Vdc

mA

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

Voltage to the control terminals

(rated control voltage)

DC driven —+24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15%

Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)

Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc

Maximum current A 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%

30.5-32

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

094

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Description Unit DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N

General

Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2

Certifications/marking — UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA

Ambient temperature

(operation)

°C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per Celsius

to 60 °C

Ambient temperature

(storage)

°C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C

Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 1% of

rated current per 100 m to

a maximum of 2000 m

Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical

Protection degree — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Protection against contact — Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Back of hand and finger-

proof (from front face)

Overvoltage category/

pollution degree

— II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2

Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms

Vibration resistance

according to EN 60721-3-2

— 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2

Dimensions in inches (mm)

(W x H x D)

— 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47

(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)

4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)

4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)

4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01

(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)

Weight in lbs (kg) — 4.00 (1.8) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7)

Main Circuit

Rated operation voltage V 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac 200–460 Vac

Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated impulse

withstand voltage

Uimp 1.2 /

50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Rated operation current Ie96 124 156 180

Motor Power Ratings

200 V hp 30 40 50 60

230 V hp 30 50 60 75

460 V hp 75 100 125 150

230 V kW 30 30 45 55

400 V kW 55 75 90 110

Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2

— 96A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 124A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 156A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10 180A: AC53a; 3–5; 75–10

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-33

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

095

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Description Unit DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N

Wire Specifications

Power terminals (box terminals)

Single conductor

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

12–2/0

53–80

12 AWG–350 kcmil

44–123

12 AWG–350 kcmil

44–123

12 AWG–350 kcmil

44–123

Control signals

Single conductor

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

16 min.

3.5

Power Section

Rated impulse

withstand voltage

Uimp 1.2 /

50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Control Commands

Supply voltage control board

Nominal voltage

Nominal current ramp, TOR

Current peak (closing shorting contactors)

Us

Vdc

mA

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

+24 Vdc +10%/–15%

65

600 mA/50 ms

Voltage to the control terminals

(rated control voltage)

DC driven — +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15% +24 Vdc +10%/–15%

Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)

Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc

Maximum current A 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive 3 A, resistive

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%

30.5-34

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS6 Soft Start Controllers

096

Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.5-15. 25–75 hp Models

Figure 30.5-16. 100–150 hp Models

PE

1.18

(30.0)

PE

1.18

(30.0)

0.88

(22.5)

0.88

(22.5)

3.66

(93.0)

5.08

(129.0)

6.34

(161.0)

1.38

(35.0) 5.47

(139.0)

6.89

(175.0)

1.38

(35.0) 1.38

(35.0)

0.59

(15.0)

0.59

(15.0)

4.25

(108.0)

2.07

(52.5) 7. 0 1

(178.0)

8.47

(215.0)

PE

PE

6.22

(158.0)

7.87

(200.0)

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-35

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

097

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

General Description

Eaton’s DS7 line of reduced voltage

solid-state soft start controllers is very

compact, multi-functional, easy to

install and easy to commission.

Designed to control the acceleration

and deceleration of three-phase

motors, the device is available for

current ranges from 4–32 A in four

frame sizes.

Application Description

With its small size, it can easily fit in

place of existing soft starters, wye-delta

starters, or across-the-line NEMA® and

IEC starters. This feature allows easy

upgrades to existing systems. The

product is designed to be wired in

the three-phase line feeding the three

motor input leads as is done for

normal across-the-line starting. The

starter uses silicon controlled rectifiers

(SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the

motor, providing smooth acceleration

and deceleration of the load. After

the motor is started, the internal run

bypass relay closes, resulting in the

motor running directly across-the-line.

Internal run bypass significantly reduces

the heat generated as compared to

non-bypass starters. The soft stop

option allows for a ramp stop time that

may be longer than the coast-to-stop

time. An external overload protection

relay is needed.

Operation

Voltage Ramp Start

This start method provides a voltage

ramp to the motor, resulting in a

constant torque increase. This most

commonly used form of soft start

mode allows you to set the initial

voltage value and the duration of the

ramp to full voltage conditions.

■Adjustable initial voltage 30–92%

of full voltage (120/230 Vac control

voltage)

■Adjustable initial voltage 30–100%

of full voltage (24 Vac/Vdc control

voltage)

■Adjustable ramp time 1–30 seconds

■Bypass relays close at the end the

ramp time (TOR)

Soft Stop

Allows for a controlled stopping of

load. Used when a stop-time that is

greater than the coast-to-stop time is

desired. Often used with high friction

loads where a sudden stop may cause

system or product damage. Setting the

soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off

this feature.

■Soft stop time = 0–30 seconds

Figure 30.5-17. Start Ramp

Figure 30.5-18. Stop Ramp

Auxiliary Contacts

Auxiliary contacts are provided to

indicate soft start controller status.

Frame Size 1 (4A to 12A)—One Relay

The auxiliary relay indicates when the

soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).

Frame Size 2 (16A to 32A)—Two Relays

One auxiliary relay indicates when the

soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).

One auxiliary relay indicates that a RUN

command is present, including start

ramp, bypass and stop ramp times.

Bypass

Speed

Time (Seconds)

Start Run

100%

Speed

Time (Seconds)

Run Soft Stop

100%

1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)

2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)

3 = Soft Stop Time

1

2

3

30.5-36

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

098

Features and Benefits

■Run bypass mode greatly reduces

internal heating created by the

power dissipation across the SCRs.

The bypass relay directly connects

the motor to the line and improves

system efficiency by reducing

internal power losses

■Less heat minimizes enclosure size

and cooling requirements, and

maximizes the life of all devices

in the enclosure

■LED displays device status and

provides fault indication

■Variable ramp times and voltage

control (torque control) settings

provide unlimited starting configu-

rations, allowing for maximum

application flexibility

■Soft stop control suits applications

where an abrupt stop of the load

is not acceptable. Soft acceleration

and deceleration reduces wear on

belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts

and bearings

■Minimizes the peak inrush current’s

stress on the power system. Peak

starting torque can be managed to

diminish mechanical system wear

and damage

■24 Vac/Vdc control voltage enhances

personnel and equipment safety.

120/230 Vac control voltage is

also available

■Auxiliary relays indicate status of

the soft start controllers

❑The TOR relay is active until

motor stop command is received

and/or the soft start controller

detects a fault condition

❑RUN relay is active during

the start ramp, bypass and

stop ramp

Protective Features

■Mains connection—The mains

connection is monitored for a phase

loss and/or undervoltage during

ramp up

■Motor connection—The motor

connection is monitored for an open

condition during the ramp

■SCR faults—SCR performance is

monitored during the ramp cycle

for proper operation

■Heat sink over/under temperature—

High ambient temperatures, extended

ramp times and high duty cycle

conditions may cause the DS7 to

exceed its thermal rating. When

temperature goes under –5 °C, unit

will trip as well. The DS7 is equipped

with sensors that monitor the

temperature of the device. The

soft starter will trip in over/under

temperature conditions, preventing

device failure

■Warning is indicated for an over-

temperature condition for the

next start

■Bypass relay

❑The DS7 can detect if the bypass

relay fails to close after the ramp

start or opens while the motor is

running

❑The DS7 will also detect a condi-

tion whereas the bypass relay is

closed when the RUN command

is given

❑The DS7 will trip on a bypass

dropout fault if either of these

conditions occur

Standards and Certifications

■IEC 60947-4-2

■EN 60947-4-2

■UL listed

■CSA certified

■CE marked

■C-Tick

Additional Information

■Instruction Leaflet IL03901001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-37

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

099

Product Selection

DS7 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.

Table 30.5-29. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C 1

1Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.

2Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.

3Not to be used with 230 V.

424 Vac/Vdc device.

5120/230 Vac device.

Table 30.5-30. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—Horsepower Ratings—10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C 6

6Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.

7Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.

8Not to be used with 230 V.

924 Vac/Vdc device.

j120/230 Vac device.

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (hp) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size

Recommended

XTOB Overload

(Direct Connect) 2

Recommended

XTOE Overload

2

MMP 2Connection

Kit to MMP

Catalog

Number

200 V 230 V 480 V

3.7 0.75 0.75 2 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 4

DS7-342SX004NO-N 5

6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 3XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 4

DS7-342SX007NO-N 5

7.8 2 2 5 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 4

DS7-342SX009NO-N 5

11 3 3 7.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 4

DS7-342SX012NO-N 5

15.2 3 5 10 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 4

DS7-342SX016NO-N 5

22 5 7.5 15 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 4

DS7-342SX024NO-N 5

32 7.5 10 20 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 4

DS7-342SX032NO-N 5

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (hp) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size

Recommended

XTOB Overload

(Direct Connect) 7

Recommended

XTOE Overload

7

MMP 7Connection

Kit to MMP

Catalog

Number

200 V 230 V 480 V

3 0.5 0.5 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 9

DS7-342SX004NO-N j

4.8 1 1 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 8XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 9

DS7-342SX007NO-N j

6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 9

DS7-342SX009NO-N j

9 2 2 5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 9

DS7-342SX012NO-N j

11 3 3 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 9

DS7-342SX016NO-N j

17.5 5 5 10 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 9

DS7-342SX024NO-N j

22 5 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 9

DS7-342SX032NO-N j

30.5-38

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

100

DS7 Soft Start kW Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection.

Table 30.5-31. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—

10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40 °C 1

1Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.

2Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.

3Not to be used with 230 V.

424 Vac/Vdc device.

5120/230 Vac device.

Table 30.5-32. DS7 Soft Start Controllers—kW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2—

10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40 °C 6

6Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA.

7Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480 V.

8Not to be used with 230 V.

924 Vac/Vdc device.

j120/230 Vac device.

Considerations

1. Either XTOB or XTOE or equivalent

overload protection devices may

be selected. In addition, manual

motor protectors—MMP series

can also be considered.

2. Isolation contactor is required for

mains isolation.

24 Vdc Control Power

Eaton’s ELC power supplies are

recommended as a compact and

low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The

light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices

have a wide input voltage range and

robust screw terminals make these

power supplies easy to install and use.

These power supplies are available in

1A and 2A models.

AC Control Power

24, 120 or 230 Vac may be used for

control power in accordance with the

model requirements.

Table 30.5-33. DC Power Supply Selection

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (kW) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size

Recommended

XTOB Overload

(Direct Connect) 2

Recommended

XTOE Overload 2

MMP 2Connection

Kit to MMP

Catalog

Number

230 V 400 V

3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 4

DS7-342SX004NO-N 5

7 1.5 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 3XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 4

DS7-342SX007NO-N 5

9 2.2 4 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 4

DS7-342SX009NO-N 5

12 3 5.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 4

DS7-342SX012NO-N 5

16 4 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 4

DS7-342SX016NO-N 5

24 5.5 11 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 4

DS7-342SX024NO-N 5

32 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 4

DS7-342SX032NO-N 5

Rated

Current

Amperes

Motor Power (kW) Maximum

Allowable

Breaker Size

Maximum

Allowable

Fuse Size

Recommended

XTOB Overload

(Direct Connect) 7

Recommended

XTOE Overload 7

MMP 7Connection

Kit to MMP

Catalog

Number

230 V 400 V

2.5 0.33 1 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N 9

DS7-342SX004NO-N j

3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 8XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 9

DS7-342SX007NO-N j

7 1.5 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 9

DS7-342SX009NO-N j

9 2.2 4 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 9

DS7-342SX012NO-N j

12 3 5.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 9

DS7-342SX016NO-N j

16 4 7.5 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 9

DS7-342SX024NO-N j

24 5.5 11 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 9

DS7-342SX032NO-N j

Description Catalog

Number

85–264 V input and 24 V output

380–480 V input and 24 V output

ELC-PS01

PSS25F

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-39

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

101

Technical Data and Specifications

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers

Rated Control Circuit

Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc

Voltage 110/230 Vac

Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N

DS7-342SX004NO-N

DS7-340SX007NO-N

DS7-342SX007NO-N

DS7-340SX009NO-N

DS7-342SX009NO-N

DS7-340SX012NO-N

DS7-342SX012NO-N

General

Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE

marking

IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE

marking

IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE

marking

IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE

marking

Certifications/marking — UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick

Ambient temperature

(operation)

°C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate

linearly by 1% of rated

current per Celcius to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate

linearly by 1% of rated

current per Celcius to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate

linearly by 1% of rated

current per Celcius to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 °C derate

linearly by 1% of rated

current per Celcius to 60 °C

Ambient temperature

(storage)

°C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C

Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 2.5% of

rated current per 100 m to a

maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 2.5% of

rated current per 100 m to a

maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 2.5% of

rated current per 100 m to a

maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m

derate linearly by 2.5% of

rated current per 100 m to a

maximum of 2000 m

Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical

Protection class — IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Protection class applies

to the front and operator

control and display

elements. Protection type

from all sides is IP00.

— With optional covers from

the NZM range, protection

type IP40 from all sides can

be achieved

With optional covers from

the NZM range, protection

type IP40 from all sides can

be achieved

With optional covers from

the NZM range, protection

type IP40 from all sides can

be achieved

With optional covers from

the NZM range, protection

type IP40 from all sides can

be achieved

Busbar tag shroud — Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Overvoltage category/

pollution degree

— II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2

Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms

Vibration resistance

according to EN 60721-3-2

— 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2

Mean heat dissipation at

rated duty cycle

W 0.2 0.35 0.35 0.6

Radio interference — B B B B

Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95

in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74

Weight kg 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35

lb 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77

Main Circuit

Rated operational voltage V 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac

Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated operation current

AC 53

Ie47912

Motor Power Ratings

200 V hp 0.75 1.5 2 3

230 V hp 0.75 2 2 5

480 V hp 2 3 5 10

230 V kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3

400V kW 1.5 3 4 5.5

Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2

— 4 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 7 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 9 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 12 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10

30.5-40

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

102

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Rated Control Circuit

Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc

Voltage 110/230 Vac

Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N

DS7-342SX004NO-N

DS7-340SX007NO-N

DS7-342SX007NO-N

DS7-340SX009NO-N

DS7-342SX009NO-N

DS7-340SX012NO-N

DS7-342SX012NO-N

Wire Specifications

Power terminals

Single conductor—solid or stranded

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

18–10

11

18–10

11

18–10

11

18–10

11

Control signals

Single conductor—solid or stranded

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

18–10

11

18–10

11

18–10

11

18–10

11

Power Section

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

1.2/ 50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Rated insulation voltage — 500 500 500 500

Control Commands—Vac/Vdc

Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vdc 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4

Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6

Pickup voltage — +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27

Dropout voltage — +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)

Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250

Maximum current A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–100% 30–100% 30–100% 30–100%

Control Commands—Vac

Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vac 102–253 102–253 102–253 102–253

Current consumption at 24 Vac/VdcmA4444

Pickup voltage Vac 102–230 102–230 102–230 102–230

Dropout voltage Vac 0–28 0–28 0–28 0–28

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)

Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250

Maximum current A 3 A 3 A 3 A 3 A

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-41

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

103

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Rated Control Circuit

Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc

Voltage 110/230 Vac

Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N

DS7-342SX016NO-N

DS7-340SX024NO-N

DS7-342SX024NO-N

DS7-340SX032NO-N

DS7-342SX032NO-N

General

Standards — IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking

IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking

IEC/EN 60947-4-2;

GB14048.6; UL508;

CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;

CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking

Certifications/marking — UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick

Ambient temperature

(operation)

°C 0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly

by 1% of rated current per Celcius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly

by 1% of rated current per Celcius

to 60 °C

0 to 40 °C, above 40 C derate linearly

by 1% of rated current per Celcius

to 60 °C

Ambient temperature

(storage)

°C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C

Altitude — 0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate

linearly by 2.5% of rated current

per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate

linearly by 2.5% of rated current

per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m

0–1000 m, above 1000 m derate

linearly by 2.5% of rated current

per 10 0m to a maximum of 2000 m

Installation — Vertical Vertical Vertical

Protection class — IP20 IP20 IP20

Protection class applies to

the front and operator

control and display ele-

ments. Protection type

from all sides is IP00.

— With optional covers from the NZM

range, protection type IP40 from all

sides can be achieved

With optional covers from the NZM

range, protection type IP40 from all

sides can be achieved

With optional covers from the NZM

range, protection type IP40 from all

sides can be achieved

Busbar tag shroud — Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Back of hand and finger-proof

(from front face)

Overvoltage category/

pollution degree

— II/2 II/2 II/2

Shock resistance — 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms

Vibration resistance

according to EN 60721-3-2

— 2M2 2M2 2M2

Mean heat dissipation at

rated duty cycle

W 0.8 1.1 1.5

Radio interference — B B B

Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118

in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74

Weight kg 0.4 0.4 0.4

lb 0.88 0.88 0.88

Main Circuit

Rated operational voltage V 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac 230–460 Vac

Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated operation current

AC 53

Ie16 24 32

Motor Power Ratings

200 V hp 3 5 10

230 V hp 5 7.5 10

480 V hp 10 15 25

230 V kW 4 5.5 7.5

400 V kW 7.5 11 15

Overload cycle according

to EN 60947-4-2

— 16 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 24 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 32 A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10

30.5-42

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

104

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Rated Control Circuit

Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc

Voltage 110/230 Vac

Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N

DS7-342SX016NO-N

DS7-340SX024NO-N

DS7-342SX024NO-N

DS7-340SX032NO-N

DS7-342SX032NO-N

Wire Specifications

Power terminals

Single conductor—solid or stranded

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

18–6

11

18–6

11

18–6

11

Control Signals

Single conductor—solid or stranded

Terminal torque

AWG

lb-in

18–10

11

18–10

11

18–10

11

Power Section

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

1.2/ 50 µs

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Rated insulation voltage — 500 500 500

Control Commands—Vac/Vdc

Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vdc 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4 20.4–26.4

Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6

Pickup voltage — +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27

Dropout voltage — +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready)

Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250

Maximum current A 1 A 1 A 1 A

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–100% 30–100% 30–100%

Control Commands—Vac

Supply voltage control board Us nominal Vac 102–253 102–253 102–253

Current consumption at 102–253 Vac mA 4 4 4

Pickup voltage Vac 102–230 102–230 102–230

Dropout voltage Vac 0–28 0–28 0–28

Relay Outputs

Number of relays — 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run)

Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250

Maximum current A 3 A 3 A 3 A

Soft Start Functions

Ramp times

Start ramp

Stop ramp

s

s

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

1–30

0–30

Initial voltage % line voltage — 30–92% 30–92% 30–92%

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-43

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

DS7 Soft Start Controllers

105

Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Figure 30.5-19. Frame Size 1

Figure 30.5-20. Frame Size 2

5.12

(130.0)

3.74

(95.0)

M4

1.38

(35.0)

1.78

(45.0)

4.80

(122.0)

4.92

(125.0)

Catalog Numbers

DS7-340SX004N0-N DS7-342SX004N0-N

DS7-340SX007N0-N DS7-342SX007N0-N

DS7-340SX009N0-N DS7-342SX009N0-N

DS7-340SX012N0-N DS7-342SX012N0-N

5.91

(150.0)

4.65

(118.0)

M4

1.38

(35.0)

1.78

(45.0)

5.51

(140.0)

Catalog Numbers

DS7-340SX016N0-N DS7-342SX016N0-N

DS7-340SX024N0-N DS7-342SX024N0-N

DS7-340SX032N0-N DS7-342SX032N0-N

30.5-44

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

106

PSG Series

DC Power Supplies

PSG Series

General Description

Eaton’s PSG Series of power supplies

is designed to be a high-performance,

high-quality line of products covering

a majority of 24 Vdc control applica-

tions. With global certifications,

compact size and an impressive

operating temperature range, the

PSG Series fits a wide variety of

applications at a competitive price.

Eight models are offered, from 2.5 A

up to 20 A with both single- and three-

phase input voltage models available.

Application Description

The PSG Series is a line of general-

purpose power supplies for use in a

wide variety of industrial control

applications. Applications include

communication networks, sensors,

PLCs and many other electrical

systems.

Each model is equipped with a rugged

metal housing, heavy-duty screw

terminals and a variety of protection

features, making the PSG one of the

most versatile industrial power supply

lines on the market.

Features, Benefits and Functions

■Universal input voltages: 85–264 Vac

for single-phase units, 320–575 Vac

for three-phase units

■Rugged aluminum housing stands

up to harsh environments

■Current surge (power boost) of 1.5

times nominal current for 1 second

allows branch protection and

powering of high pickup loads

■Wide operating temperature range:

–20° C to +75 °C (derating above

50 °C)

■Adjustable DC voltage output

■LED indicating light for DC OK

simplifies troubleshooting

■Compact size, with common depth

and height across all models, allows

for common panel depths and

family consistency

■MTBF up to 800,000 hours ensures

uptime and reliability

■Heavy-duty screw terminals with

finger-safe protective cover allow

use of ring-lug terminals

■All-metal DIN rail mounting

hardware

■Class 1, Division 2 hazardous

location rated

Standards and Certifications

■UL/cUL listed—UL 508 (industrial

control equipment)

■cURus—UL 60950-1

■IEC

■EN

■German safety

■CSA certified (contact Eaton for

certification dates and status)

■CE marked

■RoHS compliant

Product Selection

Table 30.5-35. Power Supply—Single-Phaseþ

Table 30.5-36. Power Supply—Three-Phaseþ

Description Catalog

Number

85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5 A output

85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5 A output

PSG60E

PSG120E

85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10 A output

85–264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20 A output

PSG240E

PSG480E

Description Catalog

Number

320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5 A output

320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5 A output

PSG60F

PSG120F

320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10 A output

320–575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20 A output

PSG240F

PSG480F

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-45

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

107

Technical Data and Specifications

Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies

1Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac.

285–264 Vac (DC input range 120–375 Vdc).

3320–575 Vac (DC input range 450–800 Vdc).

Capacity PSG60E

60W

PSG120E

120W

PSG240E

240W

PSG480E

480W

PSG60F

60W

PSG120F

120W

PSG240F

240W

PSG480F

480W

Input

Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 3 x 400–500

Vac

3 x 400–500

Vac

3 x 400–500

Vac

3 x 400–500

Vac

Voltage range 22223333

Frequency

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

47–63 Hz

(0 Hz at DC

input)

Nominal current 11.1 A 1.4 A 2.9 A 5.7 A 0.3 A 0.5 A 0.8 A 1.6 A

Inrush current

limitation 1

30 A <80 A N/A N/A <30 A <30 A <40 A <50 A

Mains buffering at

nominal load (typ.) 1

>20 ms >35 ms >20 ms >20 ms >30 ms >35 ms >35 ms >20 ms

Turn-on time <2.5 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec <2 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec

Internal fuse T3.15 AH/250 V T3.15 AH/250 V T6.3AH/250 V F10H/250 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500 V 3.15AH/500V

External fusing 6 A, 10 A or

16 A

6 A, 10 A or

16 A

10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 3 x circuit

breakers 6 A,

10 A or 16 A

3 x circuit

breakers 6 A,

10 A or 16 A

3 x circuit

breakers 6 A,

10 A or 16 A

3 x circuit

breakers 6 A,

10 A or 16 A

Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA

Output

Nominal output

voltage

24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2% 24 Vdc ± 2%

Adjustment range 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc

Nominal current 2.5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 2.5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A

Startup with

capacitive loads

Max. 8000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF Max. 10,000 µF

Max. power

dissipation idling nom-

inal load approx.

10 W 22.5 W 42.5 W 72 W 9 W 18 W 36 W 72 W

Efficiency (at 400 Vac

and nominal values)

>85% typ >84% typ >84% typ >86% typ >86% at 3 x

400 Vac;

>85% at 3 x

500 Vac

>86% at 3 x

400 Vac;

>85% at 3 x

500 Vac

>86% at 3 x

400 Vac;

>85% at 3 x

500 Vac

>86% at 3 x

400 Vac;

>85% at 3 x

500 Vac

Current surge

(at 24 Vdc)

3.75 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A 3.75 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A

Current surge time/

cycle

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

1 sec. (at 10-

sec. intervals)

Residual ripple/peak

switching (20 MHz)

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

<50 mV/

<240 mVpp

Parallel operation With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

With O-ring

Diode

Galvanic Isolation

Input/output 4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

4 kVAC (type

test)/3 kVAC

(routine test)

Input/ground 1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/1.5 kVAC

(routine test)

Output/ground 1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

1.5 kVAC (type

test)/500 Vac

(routine test)

30.5-46

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

108

Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies (Continued)

110 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s/s, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y, Z direction, in acc. with IEC 68-2-6.

230G (300 m/s/s) in all directions according to IEC 68-2-27.

Power Derating Curves

Figure 30.5-21. Vertical Mounting Position

PSG60E

Figure 30.5-22. Vertical Mounting Position

PSG60F, PSG120E, PSG120F, PSG480E,

PSG480F

Figure 30.5-23. Vertical Mounting Position

PSG240E, PSG240F

Capacity PSG60E

60W

PSG120E

120W

PSG240E

240W

PSG480E

480W

PSG60F

60W

PSG120F

120W

PSG240F

240W

PSG480F

480W

General/Physical Data

Housing material Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Aluminum

(Al5052)

Signals Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

Green LED for

DC OK

MTBF >800,000 hrs >800,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs

Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm

Dimensions (W) 32 mm 50 mm 85 mm 160 mm 70 mm 70 mm 85 mm 160 mm

Dimensions (H) 120 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 118.5 mm 120.5 mm 115 mm

Weight (kg) 0.37 0.54 1.04 1.8 0.56 0.72 0.77 1.71

Operating temperature –20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

–20°C to

+75°C (>50°C

derating)

Storage temperature –25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

–25°C to

+85°C

Operating humidity <95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

<95% RH, non-

condensing

Vibration (operating) 11111111

Pollution degree22222222

Climatic class 3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

3K3 according

to EN 60721

Safety and Protection

Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor

Surge voltage protection

against internal surge

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Safety class Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Class I

with ground

connection

Shock 22222222

Load (%)

Ambient Temperature (°C)

-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85

110

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

Load (%)

Ambient Temperature (°C)

-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85

110

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

Load (%)

Ambient Temperature (°C)

-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85

110

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-47

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

109

Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm

Note: Dimensions are for reference only.

Figure 30.5-24. PSG60E

Figure 30.5-25. PSG60F

Figure 30.5-26. PSG120E

32.0 ±0.5

5.0 ±0.2

Catalog Number:

PSG60E

24V 2.5A

Adjust

DC OK

100-240V~1.5A

50-60Hz

SPEC LABEL

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

121.0 ±0.5

105.2 ±0.5

120.5 ±0.5

70.0 ±0.5

SPEC LABEL

121.0

±0.5

111. 4 ±0.5

96.5 ±0.5

6.6

±0.1

115.0 ±0.6

13.0 4.0

5.5

121.0

±0.2

DC 24V 5A

AC 100-240V 2A

50-60 Hz

Adjust

DC OK

50.0 ±0.2

30.5-48

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

110

Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

Note: Dimensions are for reference only.

Figure 30.5-27. PSG120F

Figure 30.5-28. PSG240E

Figure 30.5-29. PSG240F

70.0 ±0.5

121.0

±0.5

111. 3 ±0.5

96.4 ±0.5

SPEC LABEL

Adjust

DC OK

6.6

±0.1

5.0 ±0.2

SPEC LABEL

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

Catalog Number:

PSG240E

Adjust

DC OK

24V 10A

100-240V~5A

50-60Hz

121.0 ±0.5

105.2 ±0.5

118.5 ±0.5

85.0 ±0.5

Catalog Number:

PSG240F

Adjust

DC OK

24V 10A

3-Phase 400-500V~0.8A 50-60Hz

5.0 ±0.2

SPEC LABEL

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

121.0 ±0.5

105.2 ±0.5

120.5 ±0.5

85.0 ±0.5

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.5-49

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Reduced Voltage—Solid-State

PSG Series DC Power Supplies

111

Dimensions—Approximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

Note: Dimensions are for reference only.

Figure 30.5-30. PSG480E

Figure 30.5-31. PSG480F

121.0 ±0.5

24V 20A

Catalog Number:

PSG480E

100-240V~ 7 A 50-60Hz

160.0 ±0.5 7. 1

6.6 ±0.1

111. 4 ±0.5

96.6 ±0.5

N L Adjust

DC OK

121.0 ±0.5

160.0 ±0.5

96.6 ±0.5

111. 4 ±0.5

Catalog Number:

PSG480F

24V 20A

3-Phase 400-500V~1.4A 50-60Hz

Adjust

DC OK

7. 1

6.6 ±0.1

30.5-50

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

112

This page intentionally left blank.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.6-1

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Enclosures

General Information

113

General Information—

Technical Reference

Enclosure Types

Enclosures provide mechanical and

electrical protection for operator and

equipment. Brief descriptions of the

various types of Eaton’s enclosures

offered by Eaton are given below. See

NEMA Standards Publication No. 250

for more comprehensive descriptions,

definitions and/or test criteria.

Ty p e 1

Type 1 (Conforms to IP40)—for Indoor Use

Suitable for most applications where

unusual service conditions do not

exist and where a measure of protec-

tion from accidental contact with

enclosed equipment is required.

Designed to meet tests for rod entry

and rust resistance. Enclosure is sheet

steel, treated to resist corrosion.

Depending on the size, knockouts are

provided on the top, bottom and

sometimes on the side.

Ty p e 3 R

Type 3R (Conforms to IP52)—for

Outdoor Use

Primarily intended for applications

where falling rain, sleet or external ice

formations are present. Gasketed

cover. Designed to meet tests for rain,

rod entry, external icing and rust resis-

tance. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated

to resist corrosion. Depending on the

size, a blank cover plate is attached to

the top (for a conduit hub) and knock-

outs are provided on the bottom.

Cover-mounted pilot device holes are

provided and covered with hole plugs.

Type 4 (Conforms to IP65)—for Indoor or

Outdoor Use

Provide measure of protection from

splashing water, hose-directed water

and wind blown dust or rain.

Constructed of sheet steel with

gasketed cover.

Designed to meet tests for hose-down,

external icing and corrosion protec-

tion. When conduit connections are

specified, enclosure has two watertight

hubs (power) installed top and bottom

or one control hub installed in

bottom—depending on size.

Cover-mounted pilot device holes are

provided and covered with hole plugs.

Ty p e 4 X

Type 4X (Conforms to IP65)—for Indoor or

Outdoor Use

Provide measure of protection from

splashing water, hose-directed water,

wind blown dust, rain and corrosion.

Constructed of stainless steel with

gasketed cover. Designed to meet

same tests as Type 4 except enclosure

must pass a 200-hour salt spray corro-

sion resistance test.

Provided as 304-grade stainless steel

as standard. Select 316-grade option

for improved corrosion resistance.

30.6-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Enclosures

General Information

114

Type 7 & 9 Bolted

Type 7/9—for Hazardous Gas Locations

For use in Class I, Group B, C or D;

Class II, Groups E, F and Class III

indoor locations as defined in the

National Electrical Code. Type 7/9

enclosures must withstand the pres-

sure generated by explosion of

internally trapped gases and be able to

contain the explosion so that gases in

the surrounding atmosphere are not

ignited. Under normal operation, the

surface temperature of the enclosure

must be below the point where it could

ignite explosive gases present in the

surrounding atmosphere. Designed to

meet explosion, temperature and

hydrostatic design tests.

Ty p e 1 2

Type 12—(Conforms to IP62)—

for Indoor Use

Provide a degree of protection from

dripping liquids (non-corrosive),

falling dirt and dust. Designed to meet

tests for drip, dust and rust resistance.

Constructed of sheet steel. Hole plugs

cover pilot device holes. There are no

knockouts, hub cover plates or hubs

installed.

Many Eaton Type 12 enclosures are

suitable for use in Class II, Division 2,

Group G and Class III, Divisions 1 and

2 locations as defined in the National

Electrical Code.

Type 12—Safety Interlock

The Type 12 enclosure can be ordered

with a safety interlock on the door that

can be padlocked off. A vault-type door

latch system is used. A tapered plate

holds the gasketed door tight against

the case edge to provide a positive

seal. The special door interlock

consists of the door handle and a

screwdriver operated cover defeater.

The cover defeater and the disconnect

interlock defeater are both recessed

screwdriver operated devices which

cannot be manipulated with other

types of tools.

Table 30.6-1. IEC IP Index of Protection Ratings

Table 30.6-2. NEMA Standard to

IP Equivalence

1st

Number

Description 2nd

Number

Description

0 No protection 0 No protection

1 Protection against solid objects

greater than 50 mm

1 Protection against vertically falling

drops of water

2 Protection against solid objects

greater than 12 mm

2 Protection against dripping water

when tilted up to 15 degrees

3 Protection against solid objects

greater than 2.5 mm

3 Protection against spraying water

4 Protection against solid objects

greater than 1 mm

4 Protection against splashing water

5 Total protection against dust—

limited ingress (dust protected)

5 Protection against water jets

6 Total protection against dust

(dust-tight)

6 Protection against heavy seas

— — 7 Protection against the effects of

immersion

— — 8 Protection against submersion

Ty p e I P

140

3R 52

465

4X 65

12 62

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.6-3

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Enclosures

General Information

115

Table 30.6-3. Enclosure Selection and Reference Chart—Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: See Eaton’s Enclosed Control guide or Web site for further details on enclosures.

Table 30.6-4. Noncombination Solid-State Reduced Voltage

Box Dimensions

1Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two

four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a

DNA module or MOV.

2Same as footnote 1, but CPT is not included. Upsize to 7A enclosure to

include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.

Table 30.6-5. Combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Box Dimensions

3Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two

four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a

DNA module or MOV.

4Enclosure may be reduced to an A1, with all space for all items as in

footnote 3, excluding relays and CPTs.

5Same as footnote 3, but CPT is not included. Upsize to B1 enclosure to

include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.

Note: For enclosure box dimensions, refer to table above.

Box Designation NEMA Enclosure Type Width Height Depth

1 1 5.62 (142.7) 9.51 (241.6) 4.81 (122.2)

2 1 7.73 (196.3) 12.60 (320.0) 5.84 (148.3)

3 1 12.65 (321.3) 13.85 (351.8) 6.40 (162.6)

4 1 11.66 (296.2) 25.99 (660.1) 8.03 (204.0)

5 12, 3R, 4X 9.84 (250.0) 13.31 (338.1) 6.70 (170.2)

6 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 6.70 (170.2)

6A 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 8.44 (214.4)

7 12, 3R, 4X 12.26 (311.4) 14.37 (365.0) 6.70 (170.2)

7A 12, 3R, 4X 16.26 (413.0) 14.37 (365.0) 10.90 (276.9)

8 12, 3R, 4X 14.25 (362.0) 12.10 (307.3) 8.47 (215.1)

9 1, 12, 3R 4X 25.50 (647.7) 29.10 (739.1) 8.41 (213.6)

10 1, 12, 3R 4X 20.00 (508.0) 47.85 (1215.4) 10.48 (266.2)

A 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)

A 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 6.66 (169.2)

A1 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 8.49 (215.6)

A1 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 8.49 (215.6)

B 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 6.66 (169.2)

B 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 6.66 (169.2)

B1 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 10.90 (276.9)

B1 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 10.90 (276.9)

C 1 20.50 (520.7) 30.50 (774.7) 8.44 (214.4)

C 12, 3R, 4X 20.50 (520.7) 32.36 (822.0) 8.44 (214.4)

D 1 29.50 (749.3) 35.00 (889.0) 8.75 (222.3)

D 12, 3R, 4X 29.50 (749.3) 38.10 (967.7) 8.75 (222.3)

E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 28.00 (711.2) 61.75 (1568.5) 10.68 (271.3)

F1E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 37.00 (940.0) 74.75 (1898.7) 19.25 (489.0)

F2E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 42.00 (1066.8) 92.90 (2360.0) 19.25 (489.0)

P1 1 8.50 (215.9) 32.98 (837.7) 6.66 (169.2)

P3 1 18.86 (479.0) 38.40 (975.4) 8.47 (215.1)

P5 1 21.00 (533.4) 48.40 (1229.4) 8.97 (227.8)

P7 1 28.80 (731.5) 60.58 (1538.7) 19.28 (489.7)

I 1, 12 8.62 (219.0) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)

J 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 16.50 (419.1) 17.23 (437.6)

K 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 19.50 (495.3) 7.23 (183.6)

L 1, 12, 3R 15.87 (403.1) 16.50 (419.1) 7.23 (183.6)

M 1, 12 15.87 (403.1) 24.50 (622.3) 7.23 (183.6)

Ampere

Rating

SSRV Non-

combination

Ampere

Rating

SSRV Non-

combination

Box No. 1Box No. 1

0.8–27

37

50

66

105

135

180

S752

S801/S811

S752

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

6A 2

7A

6A 2

7A

7A

B1

C

304

360

420

500

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

G1

G1

10

10

650

720

850

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

10

10

10

240

S801/S811 G1 1000 S801/S811 10

Ampere

Rating

SSRV Comb.

with

Fuses

Comb.

with

HMCP

Ampere

Rating

SSRV Comb.

with

Fuses

Comb.

with

HMCP

Box

No.

3

Box

No.

3

Box

No.

3

Box

No.

3

0.8–27

37

50

66

105

135

180

S752

S801/S811

S752

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

B1

4

B1

C

C

D

D

E

A1

5

A1

5

A1

5

A1

B1

C

E

304

360

420

500

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

E

E

E

E

650

720

850

S801/S811

S801/S811

S801/S811

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

F1E

240 S801/S811 F1E E 1000 S801/S811 F1E F1E

30.6-4

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters and Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

116

This page intentionally left blank.

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

30.7-1

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Group Control

Group Control Multi-Pak

117

Group Control Multi-Pak

Multi-Pak Four Compartment Enclosure

Showing Variety of Possible Equipment

Module Combinations Available

Application Description

Eaton’s Multi-Pak Group Control is

designed to save time, space, and

expense in installing motor control

devices—whether for residential,

commercial, or industrial buildings.

The modular assembly allows versatile,

on-the-job arrangement of Sizes 1

through 4 combination starters with

ambient compensated relays, incoming

or feeder circuit breakers or fusible dis-

connect switches, pushbuttons, control

transformers, timers, relays, and fuses.

The enclosures and separate, pre-wired

modules are field-stocked and can be

ordered individually, permitting field tai-

loring to suit the application.

Benefits

■Enclosures and pre-wired equip-

ment modules are individually avail-

able from stock. Each shipping

carton contains complete mounting

and installation instructions

■Cuts installation time by 25 percent.

The pre-wired modules can be

installed easily, using only a

screwdriver, at the job site

■Saves space over individually

mounted control

■Can be wall or rack mounted

■Has flexible panel space for

auxiliary control items. Barriers

can be removed to provide

oversized compartments

■Eliminates square duct or cable

entrance box

■Simplifies wiring

■Permits quick, easy additions

and rearrangements

■UL listed—E69852, Guide NITW

Enclosure Features

The Type 1 enclosures are partitioned

into either four or six compartments,

to hold combination starter modules,

incoming or feeder circuit breakers, fus-

ible switches, or other auxiliary devices.

The barriers can be removed to provide

oversized spaces. Each enclosure holds

up to four Size 1 or 2 full-voltage, non-

reversing combination starter modules;

up to two Size 3 or 4 starter modules,

or a combination of both size ranges.

The compartments have hinged doors,

interlocked to prevent opening when the

breaker switch is in the ON position. The

disconnect operating mechanism can be

padlocked in the OFF position.

The Multi-Pak enclosure adapts easily

to installation requirements. Multiple

units can be arranged to suit the space

available—horizontally on a single line

or two-high. Knockouts are provided at

the top, bottom and sides of the enclo-

sures for conduit connection. Conduit

can be installed and cables pulled as

dictated by the construction schedule.

Combination starter modules and

incoming or feeder devices can be

installed days, months or years later.

In addition to the barrier compartments,

the enclosure contains two wiring

troughs. The top section is a wireway

fitted with three power terminal straps,

each having terminals for extension

to adjoining enclosures and to all four

compartments. The incoming line and

extension terminals are suitable for

either copper or aluminum conductors,

from No. 6 to 350 kcmil. At the bottom

of the enclosure is another wiring

trough for interconnecting wiring

and outgoing cables.

Hinging of the front doors provides

for easy access to each module.

The doors are also gasketed with a

fire-retardant material. Knockouts

are provided on the doors for the

mounting of pushbuttons and

indicating lights.

The enclosure and wireway cover plates

come in ASA-70 light gray enamel. An

identification card retainer is mounted

on each compartment door. A dust- and

weather-resistant enclosure to house

the Type 1 enclosure is also available.

Typical Six Compartment Multi-Pak

After Assembly

30.7-2

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

April 2016

Motor Starters & Contactors—Low Voltage

Sheet 30

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

4 3

Group Control

Group Control Multi-Pak

118

Combination Starter Modules

Eaton’s starter modules consist of

a Class A200 magnetic line-starter,

prewired with a motor circuit protector

or a fusible DS disconnect switch on a

panel. Full-voltage non-reversing and

reversing, combination starters are

available. An external reset button is

mounted on the starter module door.

With its versatile, modular design, the

Multi-Pak starter permits a variety of

motor control groupings. One module

can contain many different arrange-

ments of devices, such as combination

linestarter with control transformers,

and/or relays, or two feeder circuit

breakers, or fusible switches.

The contactor design comprises a glass

polyester case with silver-cadmium

oxide alloy contacts, straight-through

wiring, out-front terminals, molded

coils, stainless steel kickout springs,

U-type magnet, and a shock absorber

baseplate.

The circuit breakers, equipped with

adjustable magnetic trip elements,

protect against short circuits. Standard

three-pole, inverse-time, and ambient

compensated thermal overload relays

protect against overload.

Fusible switches are equipped to

accept either 250 V or 600 V Class H, K,

and R cartridges fuses, with capacities

as listed by Underwriters Laboratories

for overcurrent protection.

ON-OFF operating mechanisms are

molded

from an ABS fire-resistant

material.

Components of each module have

individual printed labels identifying

size, voltage, ampere rating and so on.

The labels also contain a schematic

drawing reference number covering

the wiring of

the component contained

in the module.

Technical Data

Dimensions and Wiring Arrangements

Four compartment enclosures are

32.00 inches (812.8 mm) wide, 26.00

inches (660.4 mm) high, and 7.00 inches

(177.8 mm) deep with provisions for

four-bolt wall mounting. Six compart-

ment enclosures are an additional

16.00 (406.4) inches wide. Enclosures

may be grouped together by nippling

through knockouts provided.

Load and control conduits may enter

at the top or bottom. Starter wiring

diagram and overload heater installa-

tion instructions are attached to each

starter door.

Dust and weather-resistant enclosures

for four or six module units are available.

These enclosures are 34.00 inches

(863.6 mm) or 50.00 inches (1270.0 mm)

wide, 31.00 inches (787.4 mm) high,

and 11.75 inches (298.5 mm) deep.

Figure 30.7-1. Wiring Arrangements

Figure 30.7-2. Type 1 Enclosures—Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Outgoing Conduits May Be All

at T op, All at Bottom or Mixed

Outgoing Conduits May Be All

at Top, All at Bottom or Mixed One Compartment Used

to Feed Supply to Bottom

Supply Feed Thru Nipples

Supply Feed Thru Nipples

Incoming Line

at Top or Side

(Either End)

Incoming Line

at Top or Side

(Either End)

26

52

H-Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each

1, 2 or 3 Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each

6.38

(162.1)

6.13

(155.7)

8.50

(215.9)

7. 0 0

(177.8 )

(8) Knockouts on

2-3/4 Centers (Top 8 Bottom)

(8) 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch Knockouts

32.00

(812.8) 28.00

(711.2)

5.50

(139.7)

18.63

(473.1)

0.25

(6.4)

0.63

(16.0)

22.00

(558.8)

20.00

(508.0)

2.00

(50.8)

3.00

(76.2)

1.25

(31.8)

(4) Mounting Holes for 5/16 Bolts (8) 2, 2-1/2 Inch

Knockouts

3.38

(85.9)

Note: For Six

Compartment

Enclosure

Add 16 Inches

to Width.

2.00

(50.8)

3.00

(76.2)

3.38

(85.9)

3.00

(76.2)

2.00

(50.8)

3.00

(76.2)